Lincoln 2011 Mkx Owners Manual Ford

2015-10-23

: Lincoln Lincoln-2011-Lincoln-Mkx-Owners-Manual-817559 lincoln-2011-lincoln-mkx-owners-manual-817559 lincoln pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 362

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Table of Contents
Introduction
Instrument Cluster

4
12

Warning lights and chimes
Gauges
Message center

12
17
18

Entertainment Systems

MyLincoln Touch™ system

Climate Controls
Automatic temperature control
Touchscreen features
Rear window defroster

Lights
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Bulb replacement

Driver Controls
Windshield wiper/washer control
Steering wheel adjustment
Power windows
Mirrors
Speed control
Adaptive cruise control

35
35
38
41

43
43
48
50

56
56
58
62
64
66
68

Locks and Security

Locks
Anti-theft system

96
110

Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating
Safety restraints
Airbags
Child restraints

114
114
126
141
156
1

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Table of Contents
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire information
Tire inflation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Vehicle loading
Trailer towing
Recreational towing

Driving
Starting
Brakes
AdvanceTrac威
Transmission operation
Reverse sensing system
Rear-view camera system

Roadside Emergencies
Getting roadside assistance
Hazard flasher control
Fuel pump shut-off
Fuses and relays
Changing tires
Wheel lug nut torque
Jump starting
Wrecker towing

Customer Assistance
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)
Reporting safety defects (Canada only)

Cleaning

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

173
175
177
190
196
202
205

207
207
213
215
223
227
229

250
250
251
252
252
261
267
268
272

274
281
281

282

Table of Contents
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Battery
Engine coolant
Fuel information
Air filter(s)
Part numbers
Maintenance product specifications and capacities
Engine data

290
292
294
297
300
306
321
324
325
328

Accessories

331

Ford Extended Service Plan

334

Scheduled Maintenance Guide

338

Normal scheduled maintenance and log

Index

344

357

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2010 Ford Motor Company

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Lincoln. Please take the time to
get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The
more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the
safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is
an integral part of the vehicle.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
5

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the section Airbag Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION FOR P265/40R22 LOW-PROFILE TIRES
AND WHEELS
If your vehicle is equipped with P265/40R22 tires, they are low-profile tires.
These tires and wheels are designed to give your vehicle a sport
appearance. With low-profile tires, you may notice an increase in road noise
and faster tire wear, depending on road conditions and driving styles. Due
to their design, low-profile tires and wheels are more prone to road damage
from potholes, rough or unpaved roads, car wash rails and curb contact
than standard tires and wheels. Your vehicle’s warranty does not cover
these types of damage. Tires should always be kept at the correct inflation
pressures and extra caution should be taken when operating on rough
roads to avoid impacts that could cause wheel and tire damage.
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC威
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information
may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford
authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be
used for any purpose. See your SYNC威 supplement for more information.
6

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was travelling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data or information
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see
limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have such special equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Ford Motor Company
and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder
information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court
order or where required by law enforcement, other government
authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority.
Other parties may seek to access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
7

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event
Data Recorders applies to SYNC威 or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911
Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose
to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash
involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates
to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically
or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911
operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If
you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the
911 Assist feature. See your SYNC威 supplement for more
information.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped, U.S. only) the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”) only to help provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches your request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate
the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to
provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel
information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and
Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC威 supplement
for more information.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
CELL PHONE USE
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and
portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle.
We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving
and that you comply with all applicable laws.
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert

See Owner’s Guide

Fasten Safety Belt

Airbag - Front

Airbag - Side

Child Seat Lower
Anchor

Child Seat Tether
Anchor

Brake System

Anti-Lock Brake System

Parking Brake System

Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based

Parking Aid System

Stability Control System

Speed Control

Master Lighting Switch

Hazard Warning Flasher

Fog Lamps-Front

Fuse Compartment

Fuel Pump Reset

Windshield Wash/Wipe

Windshield
Defrost/Demist

Rear Window
Defrost/Demist

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear

Power Window Lockout

Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock

Interior Luggage
Compartment Release

Panic Alarm

Engine Oil

Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant
Temperature

Do Not Open When Hot

Battery

Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks

Battery Acid

Explosive Gas

Fan Warning

Power Steering Fluid

Maintain Correct Fluid
Level

Service Engine Soon

Engine Air Filter

Passenger Compartment
Air Filter

Jack

Check Fuel Cap

Low Tire Pressure
Warning

MAX
MIN

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Instrument cluster with standard measure shown; metric similar

100 120
140

80
60

180 200
160
220
140
120

100
80

60
40
20 0

km/h

MPH

OFF

Warning lights can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become
serious enough to cause extensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulbs work. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Note: Some warning lights are reconfigurable telltale (RTT) indicators.
These indicators display in the message center and function the same as
a warning light but do not display on startup.
Service engine soon: The service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned on to check the bulb and to
indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
testing. Normally, the service engine soon light will stay on until the
engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present.
However, if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight
times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. See the
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
12

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.

Powertrain malfunction/reduced
power (RTT): Illuminates when a
powertrain or an AWD fault has
been detected. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Brake system warning light: To
!
P
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
BRAKE
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to on when the
engine is not running, or in a position between on and start, or by
applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to on. If the brake
system warning light does not illuminate at this time, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Illumination after releasing the
parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system
malfunction. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and
the risk of personal injury.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
ABS
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light
also is illuminated.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned on, continues to flash or
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. A chime will sound when there is a
malfunction in the indicator light.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder威 chime feature.
Charging system (RTT):
Illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Engine oil pressure (RTT):
Illuminates when the oil pressure
falls below the normal range, refer
to Engine oil in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter.
AdvanceTrac威 : Displays when the
AdvanceTrac威/traction control is
active. If the light remains on, have
the system serviced immediately,
refer to the Driving chapter for more information.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
AdvanceTrac威 off light:
Illuminates when
AdvanceTrac威/traction control has
been disabled by the driver. Refer to
OFF
the Driving chapter for more
information.
Low tire pressure warning:
Illuminates when your tire pressure
is low. If the light remains on at
start up or while driving, the tire
pressure should be checked. Refer
to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. When
the ignition is first turned to on, the light will illuminate for 3 seconds to
ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn on or begins to
flash, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. For more
information on this system, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Low fuel (RTT): Illuminates when
the fuel level in the fuel tank is at
or near empty. Refer to Fuel gauge
in this chapter.
Speed control (RTT): The speed
control system indicator light
changes color to indicate what mode
the system is in:
• On (gray light): Illuminates
when the speed control system is turned on. Turns off when the speed
control system is engaged or turned off.
• Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the speed control system is
engaged. Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged.
Adaptive cruise control (RTT)
(if equipped): The speed control
system indicator light changes color
to indicate what mode the system is
in:
• On (gray light): Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control system
is turned on. Turns off when the speed control system is turned off.
• Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control
system is engaged. Turns off when the speed control system is
disengaged.
15

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Door ajar (RTT): Displays when
the ignition is on and any door is
not completely closed.
Tailgate ajar (RTT): Displays
when the ignition is on and the
trunk is open.

Low washer fluid (RTT):
Illuminates when the windshield
washer fluid is low.

Engine coolant temperature
(RTT): Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer
to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.

Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Fog lamps: Illuminates when the
fog lamps are turned on.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Heads up display (if equipped):
A red bar will illuminate on the
windshield in certain instances when
using adaptive cruise control and/or
the collision warning system. It will
also illuminate momentarily when
you start your vehicle to make sure the display works. See Using
adaptive cruise control in the Driving chapter for more information.
Grade assist (RTT): Illuminates
when the grade assist is turned on.

Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Parking brake on chime: Sounds when the parking brake is left on and
the vehicle is driven. If the warning stays on after the park brake is off,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
GAUGES
Shown in standard measure. Metric similar.

100 120
140
80
180 200
60

160
140
120

220

100
80

60
40
20 0

km/h

MPH

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
1. Multifunction display: This displays the fuel gauge, tachometer,
engine coolant temperature and the odometer/trip meter. This is also
used to configure different vehicle personalization options and display
the status of various vehicle functions. See Message center in this
chapter for more information.
2. Speedometer: Indicates the current vehicle speed.
3. Infotainment display: This display is used for the entertainment,
phone, navigation and climate systems. See the MyLincoln Touch™
supplement for more information.
MESSAGE CENTER
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable
laws.
Your vehicle’s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle
systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various
conditions with informational messages and/or warnings.
The message center is also used to program/configure the different
features of your vehicle. The message center display is located in the
instrument cluster.
Use the left steering wheel controls to navigate through the message
center.
Press the up/down arrow buttons to
move up/down through the message
center choices.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Press the left/right arrow buttons to
move left/right through the message
center choices.

Press the OK button to select
highlighted options and confirm
choices/messages.

Main menu
From the main menu screen you can choose the following:
Display Mode
Trip 1 & 2
Fuel Economy
Settings
Information
Scroll up/down to highlight one of the options, then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that menu option.
Menu Control: You can choose a
different menu control operation to
suite your needs. In any screen
which shows these category icons
(other than the Main menu screen)
and:

• Standard is set– then scrolling up and down will scroll through the
main categories.
19

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
• Memory on is set– then scrolling up and down will scroll through the
last selected sub-category/screen within a main category.
To change the Menu Control between Standard or Memory On, refer to
Vehicle and Menu Control found in the table under the Settings section
later in this chapter.
Display Mode
Press the right arrow on the left steering wheel mounted button when
Display Mode is selected. The boxes in the upper right corner of the
screen indicate that there are multiple screens that you can navigate
through. Each press of the right arrow will navigate to the next screen
until the last screen is reached. The white highlighted box indicates
which of the screens you are currently viewing:
Distance to empty (DTE) + Fuel
gauge + Bar tachometer

• Distance to empty (DTE): Shows approximate fuel level before the
fuel tank reaches empty. The value is dynamic and can change (raise
or lower) depending on driving style.
• Fuel gauge: Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel
tank. The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion
or on a grade. When the fuel level becomes low (50 miles [80 km] to
empty), the level indicator will change to amber. When the fuel level
becomes critically low (0 miles [0 km] to empty), the level indicator
will change to red.
Note: When a MyKey™ is in use, low fuel warnings will display earlier
.
• Bar tachometer: Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the
scale may damage the engine.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Round analog tachometer +
Fuel gauge
F

E
01234.5mii

For descriptions of the tachometer and fuel gauge, see the description
listed previously.
Round analog tachometer +
Fuel gauge + Engine coolant
temperature gauge
H
F
For descriptions of the tachometer
and fuel gauge, see the description
listed previously.
• Engine coolant temperature
E
C
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
01234.5mi
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the level indicator
will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant temperature exceeds
the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch
off the engine and let the engine cool.
Intelligent all-wheel drive
(AWD) (if equipped) + other
Intelligent AWD
gauges
6
F
For a description of the other
4
RPM
gauges, see the descriptions listed
+ 1000
previously.
2
0
• Intelligent all-wheel drive: shows
E
the AWD mode that the vehicle is
01234.5mi
in. Refer to All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) system in the Driving
chapter.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Select-Shift Automatic™ transmission (SST)
This feature allows you to manually shift gears. If your vehicle is
equipped with this feature it will be denoted by an M instead of an L
located in the shift selector indicator. Refer to Automatic transmission
operation in the Driving chapter.
When SST is activated the M will light up in the shift select indicator and
also in the message center.
The selected gear will be displayed
at the bottom of the vertical bar
6
F
tachometer (if selected).
4
RPM
+ 1000

2
E

The selected gear will be displayed
within the full analog tachometer (if
selected).

Trip 1 & 2
Press the right arrow on the left steering wheel mounted button when
trip 1 & 2 is selected. The boxes in the upper right corner of the screen
indicate that there are multiple screens that you can navigate through.
Each press of the right arrow will navigate to the next screen until the
last screen is reached. The white highlighted box indicates which of the
screens you are currently viewing:
Choose the standard or enhanced display. See the Settings chart
following to reach the trip display settings.
22

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Standard trip display
Trip 1

F
139.5 mi

4
RPM
+ 1000

00:58:44

2
0

E
01234.5mi

• Trip distance — shows the accumulated trip distance
• Elapsed trip time — timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and
restarts when the vehicle is restarted.
Enhanced trip display
Trip 1

139.5 mi
28.5 MPG
300.5 GAL

4
RPM
+ 1000

00:58:44
E

01234.5mi

• Trip distance — shows the accumulated trip distance
• Average fuel economy — shows the average fuel economy for a given
trip.
• Estimated amount of fuel consumed — shows the amount of fuel used
for a given trip.
• Elapsed trip time — timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and
restarts when the vehicle is restarted.
Press OK to pause the Trip 1 or 2 screen. Press again to un-pause.
Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Fuel Economy
Press the right arrow on the left steering wheel mounted button when
fuel economy is selected. The boxes in the upper right corner of the
screen indicate that there are multiple screens that you can navigate
through. Each press of the right arrow will navigate to the next screen
until the last screen is reached. The white highlighted box indicates
which of the screens you are currently viewing:
Instant fuel economy
Inst. Fuel Economy
Shown with vertical bar tachometer
6
enabled
F
• This display shows a visual graph
4
RPM
+ 1000
of your instantaneous fuel
2
economy. Press the right arrow to
reach the other fuel displays and
0
E
press the left arrow once to
01234.5mi
return to the previous display.
Configurable fuel history
Shown with vertical bar tachometer
enabled
• This display shows a bar chart of
your fuel history, configurable to
5, 10 or 30 minutes. To configure
the fuel history, press the right
arrow button when in this screen.

XX Min Fuel History

4
RPM
+ 1000

2
0

E
01234.5mi

If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing miles traveled by
gallons of fuel used (liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled), your
figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up.
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations.
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another.
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter).
To determine your average highway fuel economy, do the following:
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
24

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to reset fuel economy after setting the speed control to
get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices. Press
the right arrow key (when in the Settings menu) to reach the listed
modes below:
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
Driver Assist
Traction Control On / Off
Blind Spot
On (default on key cycle) / Off
Collision Warning Sensitivity (if
High / Normal / Low
MyKey™ is
programmed)
Chimes
On (default on key cycle) / Off
Warn-
On (default on key cycle) / Off
Cross Traffic
On (default on key cycle) / Off
Alert
Cruise Control
Adaptive or Normal
Rear Park Aid
On (default on key cycle) / Off
Trailer Sway
On (default on key cycle) / Off
Autolamp Delay
Easy Entry/Exit
Fuel
Locks

Menu Control

Vehicle
Off, 10 / 20 (default setting) / 30 / 60 / 90 / 120 /
180 seconds
On (default on key cycle) / Off
DTE Calculation Normal, Towing
Long Term Econ Hold OK to Reset...
Autolock,
On (default on key cycle) / Off
Autounlock
On (default on key cycle) / Off
Remote
All doors / Driver’s door
Unlocking
Standard / Memory On
25

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Oil Life Reset
Power Liftgate

Remote Start

Wipers

Create MyKey
Traction Control
Max Speed
Speed Warning
Volume Limiter
Clear MyKeys

Vehicle
Set to XXX%
Enable / Disable
Climate Control Heater – A/C
(using this
feature allows
Heated Wheel
you to select
different climate
Front Defrost
control modes
when the vehicle Rear Defrost
is started using Driver Seat
the remote start
Passenger Seat
feature)
Duration
Quiet Start
System
Courtesy Wipe
Rain Sensing
Reverse Wiper

Auto / Last
Settings
Auto Heated /
Off
Auto / Off
Auto / Off
Auto / Off
Auto / Off

5 / 10 /15 minutes
On / Off
Enable / Disable
On / Off
On / Off
On / Off

*MyKey
Press and hold OK to create MyKey
Always On / User Selectable
Set to 80 MPH (130 km/h) / Off
45 mph (72 km/h), 55 mph (89 km/h), 65 mph
(105 km/h), Off
On / Off
Hold OK to Clear MyKeys

*Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.
Gauge Display
Trip Display

Display
Fuel Gauge / Fuel gauge + Tachometer
Standard / Enhanced
Language
English / Español / Français

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Distance
Temperature

Units
Miles & Gallons / Kilometers & Liters
Fahrenheit (°F) / Celsius (°C)

Restore Defaults
Hold OK to Restore Settings to Factory Defaults
Information
In this mode, you can view different vehicle system information and
perform a system check.
MyKey
Admin Keys (Number of admin keys)
MyKeys (Number of MyKeys programmed)
MyKey Miles (km) (Distance traveled using a programmed MyKey)
System Check*
Oil Life
Wash Fluid
Doors
Liftgate
Blind spot
Cross Traffic
Brakes
Fuel (distance to empty)
*Some items will only display during a system check if a problem has
been detected. If an issue exists on one of the monitored systems, the
message center will display the number of warnings that need immediate
attention in amber. Use the up/down arrow buttons to scroll through the
list.
System warnings and status messages
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages.
27

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
Types of messages and warnings:
• Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you
may need to take action on or be informed of.
• Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem
or condition is still present and needs your attention.
• Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing OK. This
allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing the
message.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the driver door is not
completely closed.
LIFTGATE AJAR — Displayed when the liftgate is not completely
closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the passenger door is
not completely closed.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear right door is
not completely closed.
CHECK FUEL FILL INLET — Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may
not be properly closed. Refer to Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system in
the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
FUEL LEVEL LOW XXX MI TO E — Displayed as an early reminder
of a low fuel condition.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the brake fluid level is low
and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• the battery is at a low state of charge or,
• the ignition has been in accessory position or on position with the
engine off for approximately 45 minutes.
Turn the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This
message will clear once the vehicle has been started and the battery
state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads
will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
28

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the parking brake is set,
the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3mph
(5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
SERVICE ADVANCETRAC — Displayed when the AdvanceTrac威
system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
SHIFT TO PARK — Displayed when the start/stop button is pressed to
shut off the engine with the shift select lever in any position other than
P (Park). Refer to Fast restart feature in Push button start system in
the Driving chapter for more information.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON — Displayed when the engine oil life
remaining is 10% or less.
ENGINE COOLANT OVER TEMP — Displayed when the engine
coolant temperature is excessively high.
LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE — Stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, turn off the engine. Check the oil level. See Checking the
engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — Displayed when the oil life left reaches
0%.
WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the washer fluid reservoir
is less than one quarter full. Check the washer fluid level. Refer to
Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE — Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT — Displayed when the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, have the system inspected by your authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT — Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
29

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and Belt-Minder威 is activated. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
REMOVE OBJECTS NEAR PASS SEAT — Displayed when objects
are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved away from the
seat, if the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AWD OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when the AWD system has been
automatically disabled to protect itself. This is caused by operating the
vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system is
overheating. The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this
message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed or
after the system is allowed to cool.
CHECK AWD — Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle
Control/Transmission/AWD
light when the AWD system is not
operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ACCESSORY POWER ACTIVE (if equipped) — Displayed when the
vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.
CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected
speed. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
COULD NOT PROGRAM KEY — Displayed when an attempt is made
to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys. Refer to MyKey™ in
the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
KEY PROGRAMMED 3 KEYS TOTAL — Displayed during spare key
programming, when a third intelligent access key is programmed to the
system.
KEY PROGRAMMED 4 KEYS TOTAL — Displayed during spare key
programming, when a fourth intelligent access key is programmed to the
system.
MAX NUMBER OF KEYS PROGRAMMED — Displayed during spare
key programming when the maximum number of keys have been
programmed.
MYKEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed when MyKey™ is
active.
MYKEY NOT CREATED — Displayed during key programming when
MyKey™ cannot be programmed.
30

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
NO KEY DETECTED (if equipped) — Displayed if the intelligent
access key is not detected by the system in the following three scenarios:
• When the start/stop button is pressed in an attempt to either start the
engine or cycle through the ignition states.
• When the engine is running and a door is opened then closed.
•When the vehicle’s speed exceeds 10 mph (16 km/h) for the first time
after starting. Refer to Push button start system in the Driving chapter
for more information.
PRESS BRAKE TO START (if equipped) — Displayed when the
start/stop button is pressed without the brake pedal being applied. This
is a reminder that the brake pedal must be applied when the start/stop
button is pressed in order to start the engine.
RESTART NOW OR KEY IS NEEDED (if equipped) — Displayed
when the start/stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and a
intelligent access key is not detected inside the vehicle. Refer to Push
button start system in the Driving chapter for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO 130 KM/H — Displayed when starting the
vehicle and MyKey™ is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. Refer to
MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH — Displayed when starting the vehicle
and MyKey™ is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. Refer to
MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
STARTING SYSTEM FAULT — This message is displayed when there
is a problem with your vehicle’s starting security system; your vehicle
will not be able to start. See your authorized dealer for service.
VEHICLE AT TOP SPEED OF MYKEY SETTING — Displayed when
a MyKey™ is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle
speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
VEHICLE NEAR MYKEY TOP SPEED — Displayed when a MyKey™
is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is
approaching 80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
CRUISE CONTROL AUTOMATIC BRAKING TURNED OFF (if
equipped) — Displayed when adaptive cruise control automatic braking
is turned off.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE MALFUNCTION (if equipped) — Displayed
when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC from engaging.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE (if equipped) — Displayed
when conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function
properly.
31

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
ADAPTIVE CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE
MANUAL (if equipped) — Displayed when the radar is blocked
because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in
front of radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
COLLISION WARN NOT AVAILABLE (if equipped) — Displayed
when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system.
The system will be disabled.
COLLISION WARNING NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE
MANUAL (if equipped) — Displayed when the collision warning
system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad
weather or ice/mud/water in front of the radar. Driver can typically clean
the sensor to resolve.
COLLISION WARNING MALFUNCTION (if equipped) — Displayed
when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system.
The system will be disabled.
BLINDSPOT NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE MANUAL
(if equipped) — Displayed when the blind spot information
system/cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot
Information System (BLIS威) with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving
chapter.
BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when a
fault with the blind spot information system has occurred. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CROSS TRAFFIC NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE
MANUAL (if equipped) — Displayed when the blind spot information
system/cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot
Information System (BLIS威) with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving
chapter.
CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when
a fault with the cross traffic alert system has occurred. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CROSS TRAFFIC VEHICLE COMING FROM LEFT (if equipped)
— Displayed when the blind spot information system with cross traffic
alert (CTA) system is operating and senses a vehicle. See Blind Spot
Information System (BLIS威) with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving
chapter.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Instrument Cluster
CROSS TRAFFIC VEHICLE COMING FROM RIGHT (if equipped)
— Displayed when the blind spot information system with cross traffic
alert (CTA) system is operating and senses a vehicle. See Blind Spot
Information System (BLIS威) with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving
chapter.
ACTIVE PARK FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when a fault has
occurred with the active park assist system. Refer to Active park assist
in the Driving chapter for more information.
CHECK REAR PARK AID (if equipped) — Displayed when the
transmission is in R (Reverse) and the park aid is disabled.
REAR PARK AID ON OFF (if equipped) — Displays the rear park
aid status.
TO STOP ALARM START VEHICLE — Displayed when the perimeter
alarm system is armed and the vehicle is entered using the key on the
driver’s side door. In order to prevent the perimeter alarm system from
triggering, the ignition must be turned to start or on before the
12 second chime expires. See Perimeter alarm system in the Locks and
security chapter.
TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED (if equipped) — Displayed when
the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway. For more information,
refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
TRANSPORT MODE CONTACT DEALER — Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Entertainment Systems
MYLINCOLN TOUCH™
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of
the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.

This system utilizes a four corner strategy and dynamic menu listings to
provide quick access to vehicle features and settings.
For more information on this system, please refer to your MyFord
Touch™ / MyLincoln Touch™ Supplement.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Climate Controls
DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC) SYSTEM
WITH MYTEMP

Note: Your climate control system is touch sensitive. You need only
lightly touch the control graphic to activate the feature.
Note: Your vehicle is also equipped with touchscreen climate control
features. To access, press the lower right corner of the touchscreen.
Refer to Touchscreen features later in this section for more information.
Temperature conversion: To access the temperature setting, press
Menu on the touchscreen. Then press Settings > System > Temperature.
Select to view the temperature in either Fahrenheit and Celsius.
1. Passenger temperature control: Touch to activate dual zone
temperature and to increase (+) or decrease (-) the temperature on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
DUAL: Touch to activate dual zone (separate passenger temperature
control). Touch again to deactivate and return to single zone
temperature control (where the driver settings control the temperature
for the entire vehicle).
(Recirculated air): Touch to activate/deactivate air recirculation
2.
in the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculated air engages
automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can be engaged manually in
(defrost). Recirculated air may turn off
any airflow mode except
automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce fog
potential.
35

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Climate Controls
3. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Touch MAX A/C again for
normal A/C operation.
4. A/C control: Touch to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
automatically in MAX A/C,
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
5.
(Power): Touch to activate/deactivate the climate control system.
When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the
vehicle through the vents.
6.
(Fan speed): Slide your finger over the fan bar to increase or
decrease the fan speed.
7. AUTO: Touch to engage full automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow distribution, A/C on or off,
and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle in order to
reach the desired temperature.
8. R
(Rear defroster): Touch to activate/deactivate the rear
defroster. This button will also activate/deactivate the heated mirrors (if
equipped). Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for
more information.
9.
(Defrost): Distributes outside air through the windshield
defroster vents and demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield
of fog and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to
reduce window fogging. Touch this button again to return to the previous
air flow selection. To return to full automatic control, touch AUTO.
10. Driver temperature control: Touch to increase (+) or decrease (-)
the temperature on the driver side of the vehicle. If the passenger
temperature controls are not activated (dual zone), the driver’s settings
will determine the temperature setting for the entire vehicle cabin.
MyTemp: Touch and hold to save the desired temperature for MyTemp.
To access this setting again, simply touch the indicator.
The MyTemp feature can be used to store and recall a preset driver’s
temperature. This feature is provided so this temperature can be quickly
adjusted to a frequently used setting with a single button touch.
To save a new preset temperature for the active user, manually adjust
the driver’s temperature to the desired value then touch and hold the
MyTemp button for at least two seconds. Any subsequent touch of the
MyTemp button will automatically change to this set temperature for this
user.
36

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Climate Controls
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather,
(defrost).
select
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2–3 minutes after starting the vehicle or until the vehicle has
“aired out.”
• A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the
air distribution setting that is selected.
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
MAX A/C, reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting and put the
vehicle’s transmission in P (Park) to continue to receive cool air from
your A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance (MAX A/C):
1. Press MAX A/C. The system will default to single-zone operation and
set the temperature to 60°F (16°C).
2. A/C,

and

will be selected.

3. Fan speed will be determined by the vehicle’s internal temperature,
but can be adjusted as desired.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select

2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan to the highest speed.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
37

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Climate Controls
Touchscreen features
Press the lower right corner on the touchscreen to access these features.
1

3
10

(Power): Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.
1.
When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the
vehicle through the vents.
2. Passenger settings:
• Press DUAL to turn on passenger side temperature control.
• Press the red arrow to increase the temperature and press the blue
arrow to decrease the temperature.
to control the heated seat. Refer to Heated and cooled
• Press
seats in the Seat and Safety Restraints chapter.
to control the cooled seat. Refer to Heated and cooled
• Press
seats in the Seat and Safety Restraints chapter.
3.

(Fan speed): Press to + to increase or – to decrease fan speed.

(Recirculated air): Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation
4.
in the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to
cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired
odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle. Recirculated air engages
automatically when MAX A/C is selected on can be engaged manually in
(defrost). Recirculated air may turn off in
any airflow mode except
all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce fog potential.
38

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Climate Controls
5. MAX A/C: Press to distribute recirculated air through the instrument
panel vents to cool the vehicle. This is more economical and efficient
than normal A/C mode. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press again for normal A/C
operation.
6. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Engages
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
automatically in MAX A/C,
7. AUTO: Press to engage full automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow distribution, A/C on or off,
and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle in order to
reach the desired temperature.
8. R (Rear defroster): Press to activate/deactivate the rear window
defroster. This button will also activate/deactivate the heated mirror (if
equipped). Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for
more information.
(Defrost): Press to distribute outside air through the windshield
9.
defroster vents and demister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield
of fog and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to
reduce window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous
air flow selection. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
10. Manual controls: Select any of the following to determine where
airflow is directed:
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister
•
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging. To return
to full automatic control, press AUTO.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents. To return to
•
full automatic control, press AUTO.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, demister
•
vents, floor vents, rear seat floor vents. To return to full automatic
control, press AUTO.
: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear
•
seat floor vents. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
11. Driver settings:
• Press the red arrow to increase the temperature and press the blue
arrow to decrease the temperature.
39

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Climate Controls
• Press
to control the heated seat. Refer to Heated and cooled
seats in the Seat and Safety Restraints chapter.
• Press
to control the cooled seat. Refer to Heated and cooled
seats in the Seat and Safety Restraints chapter.
• Press and hold MyTemp to select a temperature you would like the
vehicle to remember and maintain for you.
• Press
(heated steering wheel) to activate your heated steering
wheel (if equipped). Note: The wood on your heated steering wheel
(if equipped) is not heated between the 10 and 2 positions.
Climate control voice commands
The following voice commands are available at the main menu level of a
and after the prompt, “Please say a
voice session. For example, press
command”, you may say any of the following commands:
•Climate On
• Climate Off
•Climate Automatic
•Climate My Temperature
•Climate Temperature <15.5–29.5> •Climate Temperature <60–85>
degrees
degrees
There are additional climate control commands but in order to access
them, you have to say “Climate” first, then when the system is ready to
listen, you may say any of the following commands:
• Automatic
• Off
• A/C Off
• Max A/C On
• Defrost On
•Rear Defrost On
• Recirc On
• Panel On
• Floor On
• Temperature High
• Fan Increase
•Temperature
• Temperature Decrease
• Temperature <60–85> degrees
• Help
40

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

• Dual Off
•On
• A/C On
• Max A/C Off
• Defrost Off
• Rear Defrost Off
• Recirc Off
• Panel Floor On
• Windshield Floor On
• Temperature Low
• Fan Decrease
• Temperature Increase
• Temperature <15.5–29.5> degrees
• My Temp

Climate Controls
*Note: If you have said “Temperature”, you can then say any of the
following commands:
• High
• Low
• <15.5–29.5> degrees
• <60–85> degrees
For more information on your touchscreen system, refer to the MyFord
Touch™ / MyLincoln Touch™ supplement.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER R
The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice.
The engine must be running to operate the rear window defroster.
to turn the rear window defroster on. An indicator light on the
Press R
button will illuminate when active. The rear window defroster turns off
automatically after a predetermined amount of time, if a low battery
condition is detected or when the ignition is turned to the off or
accessory position. To manually turn off the rear window defroster at any
time, press the control again.
If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors,
the same button will activate both. Refer to Heated outside mirrors in
the Driver Controls chapter.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
REMOTE START CLIMATE OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
The climate control system will condition the cabin temperature during
remote start. Engine idle may increase to help with adjusting the cabin
temperature.
Note: No climate control adjustments will be recognized during remote
start operation. Once the ignition is cycled to the on position, the climate
control system will return to the previous settings (last ignition-on cycle)
and adjustments can be made normally. If the previous setting was off,
the climate control system will turn off.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Climate Controls
Automatic climate control
For hot weather conditions:
• The interior cabin will be cooled to 72°F (22°C).
• The cooled seats (if equipped) will be set to high.
For cold weather conditions:
• The interior cabin will be heated to 72°F (22°C).
• The heated seats (if equipped) will be set to high.
• Rear defrost/heated mirrors (if equipped) will be activated.
For moderate weather conditions:
• The interior cabin will be heated, cooled, or off, based upon the
previous operating state (last ignition-on cycle).
• Heated/cooled seats (if equipped) will be deactivated.
• Rear defrost/heated mirrors (if equipped) will be deactivated.
CABIN AIR FILTER
The cabin air filter element is designed to reduce the concentration of
airborne particles such as dust, spores and pollen in the air being
supplied to the interior of the vehicle. The presence of a particulate filter
element provides the following benefits:
• Improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration.
• Improves the interior compartment cleanliness.
• Protects the climate control components from particle deposits.
Note: A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign
objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in
place could result in degradation or damage to the system.
For replacement intervals regarding the cabin air filter, see the
scheduled maintenance information. For more information regarding
your filter, see your authorized dealer.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking
lamps, instrument panel lamps,
license plate lamps and tail lamps.

Turns the headlamps on.

Adaptive headlamps (if equipped)
The headlamp beams move in the same direction as the steering wheel
which provides more visibility when driving around curves.
• Without adaptive headlamps (1)
• With adaptive headlamps (2)
Note: The system has a power-up
movement check feature. When the
vehicle is started, the lamps track
left to right, then back to center to
alert the driver that the system is
working properly. There is a delay of
two to five seconds before the
adaptive headlamp system will
operate when the vehicle is driven,
as the system is inactive below
3 mph (5 km/h).

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
Autolamp control
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the
.
control to

• To turn autolamps off, rotate the
control from the autolamp
position.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for a predetermined amount of time after the ignition switch is
turned to off. You can change the amount of time the lamps stay on by
using the programming procedure that follows:
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps, it will have the
headlamps on with windshield wipers feature. If the windshield
wipers are turned on, the exterior lamps will turn on with the headlamp
control in the autolamp position.
Autolamp delay system (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with autolamps, you can set the delay time to
keep the headlights on for up to three minutes after the key is turned
off. The delay time is set to 20 seconds at the factory, but the delay time
may be changed by following the steps below (Steps 1 through 6 must
be done within 10 seconds):
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Rotate the headlamp control to the autolamp position.
3. Rotate the headlamp control to the off position.
4. Turn the vehicle on.
5. Turn the vehicle off.
6. Turn the headlamp control to the autolamp position (the headlights
should turn on).
7. Turn the headlamp control to the off position when the desired delay
time (up to three minutes) has been reached.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
Fog lamp control
The fog lamps can be turned on
when the headlamp control is in
,
, or
positions
the
and the high beams are not turned
on.
Press the top of the control, located
on the instrument panel, to activate
the fog lamps. The fog lamp
indicator will illuminate when the
fog lamps are on. Press the fog lamp
control again to deactivate the fog lamps.
High beams
Pull the lever fully past the detent
to activate. Pull the lever fully again
to deactivate.

Flash-to-pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.

Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on at reduced intensity output. To activate:
• the ignition must be in the on position and
• the headlamp control must be in the off, autolamps or parking lamps
position.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
lit components in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp
operation.
• Tap the top or bottom of the
control to brighten/dim all interior
lit components incrementally, or
• Press and hold the top or bottom
of the control until the desired lighting level is reached.
Note: In the uplevel message center only, a message will pop up that will
show incrementally where the dimmer is in relation to the dimming
steps. These steps will also vary for daytime and night time dimming.
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer control requires re-calibration. Press the dimmer
control from the full dim position to the full on position to reset. This
will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions.
Dome lamp control
Use to manually turn the dome lamp
on.
• Press the bottom of the control.
This will turn on the interior
courtesy lights. The lights will
remain on until the control is
pressed again.

AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
46

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height of the
headlamp bulb center from the
ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood.
To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the
light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.
For vehicles with halogen headlamps:
On the wall or screen you will
observe a flat zone of high intensity
light located at the top of the right
hand portion of the beam pattern. If
the top edge of the high intensity
light zone is not at the horizontal
reference line, the headlamp will
need to be adjusted.
For vehicles with HID headlamps:
There is a distinct cut-off (change
from light to dark) in the left
portion of the beam pattern. The
top edge of this cut-off should be
positioned two inches (5 cm) below
the horizontal reference line.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
4. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise (to adjust down) or
counterclockwise (to adjust up).
The horizontal edge of the brighter
light should touch the horizontal
reference line.

5. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NON-ADJUSTABLE.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
The turn signal lever does not mechanically lock in the upward or
downward position when activated. The turn signal control activation and
cancellation is electronic.
• To operate the left turn signal,
push the lever down until it stops
and release.
• To operate the right turn signal,
push the lever up until it stops
and release.
• To manually cancel turn signal operation, push the lever again in
either direction.
Lane change
To indicate a left or right lane change:
• Push the lever up/down to the first stop position and release. The turn
signals will flash three times and stop.
• Push the lever up/down to the first stop position and hold. The turn
signals will flash for as long as the lever is held in this position.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front row map lamps (if equipped)
To turn on the map lamps, press the
outer edge of the clear lens. The
front row map lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the dome lamp button on the
instrument panel is activated.
• the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is off.

Map/dome lamp (if equipped)
The dome lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the dome lamp button on the
instrument panel is activated.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
off.
The map lamps are activated by pressing the controls on either side of
the lens.
Rear courtesy lamp
Located in the rear cargo area, the
courtesy lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
off.
The courtesy lamp can also be turned on and off manually by pressing
the lens depression.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
BULB REPLACEMENT
Lamp assembly condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function
Headlamp low/high beam
(halogen)
* Headlamp low/high beam
(HID)
* Front sidemarker lamp
Front park/turn signal
lamp
50

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Number of Bulbs

Trade
Number

HIR2

D3S

N/A

LED
3457NAK
(amber)

Lights
Function

Number of Bulbs

Trade
Number
LED
LED
921
C5W
LED
H11
1600XB

* Rear sidemarker lamp
N/A
* Stop/tail/turn lamp
N/A
Backup lamp
2
License plate lamp
2
* High-mount brake lamp
N/A
Fog lamp (if equipped)
2
Front row map lamp
2
Second row dome/reading
3
211-2XB
lamp
Rear courtesy lamp
1
211-2XB
Visor vanity lamp
2
37
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
* To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.
Replacing interior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Open the hood.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
3. Remove the bulb cover.

4. Turn the bulb holder
counterclockwise and remove it.

5. Disconnect the electrical
connector.

WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the new bulb.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
Replacing HID headlamp bulbs (if equipped)
The low beam headlamps on your vehicle use a “high intensity discharge”
source. These lamps operate at a high voltage. When the bulb is burned
out, the bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your
authorized dealer.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the
hood..
2. At the wheel well, remove the
fasteners from the splash shield,
then pull the splash shield back to
gain access to the bulbs.

3. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
the lamp assembly.

4. Carefully pull the bulb out of the
socket.

5. Reverse the procedure to install the new bulb.
53

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
Replacing side marker bulbs
Your vehicle is equipped with LED side marker bulbs. It is designed to
last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, see your
authorized dealer.
Replacing backup lamp bulbs
The backup lamp bulb is located in the lower portion of the tail lamp
assembly. Follow the below steps to replace the bulb.
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with a tail/stop/turn/sidemarker lamp
assembly containing integral multiple light emitting diodes (LED). See
your authorized dealer for the replacement LED module.
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position and then open
the liftgate to expose the lamp
assembly bolts.
2. Remove the two bolts from the
lamp assembly.
3. Carefully remove the lamp
assembly away from the vehicle by
pulling the assembly straight out to
expose the bulb socket. DO NOT
TIP THE LAMP ASSEMBLY SIDEWAYS.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp
assembly.
5. Pull bulb straight out of socket and snap in the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
7. Carefully install the tail lamp assembly on the vehicle by securing the
lamp assembly with two bolts.
Replacing supplemental liftgate lamp assembly
Your vehicle is equipped with a liftgate lamp assembly containing integral
multiple light emitting diodes (LED). If one or more LEDs burn out, the
complete lamp module has to be replaced. See your authorized dealer for
the replacement LED module.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Lights
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulbs
Your vehicle is equipped with an LED center high-mount stop lamp. It is
designed to last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, see
your authorized dealer.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position.
2. Remove the two screws and the
license plate lamp assembly from
the liftgate.

3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out from the lamp assembly.
Install new bulb(s) in reverse order.

Replacing fog lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the fog lamp switch is
in the off position.
2. From underneath the vehicle,
remove the splash shield and rotate
the harness/bulb assembly
counterclockwise, to remove from
the fog lamp.
3. Carefully disconnect the bulb
from the harness assembly via the two snap clips.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
2
rotate towards you to decrease the
1
0
speed of the wipers.
Speed dependent wipers (if
equipped): When the wiper control
is set to any of the interval settings except the longest pause setting, the
pause time between wiping will automatically adjust with the vehicle
speed. The faster your vehicle is travelling the shorter the pause time
between wipes will become.
Rain-sensing wipers (if equipped): The rain-sensing wipers,
designated with AUTO on the control, will automatically activate when
moisture is present on the windshield and the control is set to one of
five auto/interval moisture sensitivity settings. Rotate the end of the
control toward the windshield to increase the sensitivity. The speed of
the rain-sensing wipers will vary based on the amount of moisture
detected on the windshield and the auto/interval setting. There are no
interval (intermittent wipe) settings on vehicles with rain-sensing wipers.
The wipers will continue to wipe as long as the presence of moisture is
detected on the windshield. More or less wiping may occur depending on
humidity, mist or light rain, or road spray.
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the message center. Refer
to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean, especially the area around the
rear view mirror where the sensor is located or rain sensor performance
may be affected.
Note: During winter driving conditions with ice, snow or a salty road
mist, inconsistent or unexpected wiping or smearing may occur. In these
conditions, you can lower the sensitivity to reduce the amount of
smearing or override the feature by selecting low- or high-speed wiping
or turning the wiper system off.
Note: The rain sensing wiper feature must be turned off before entering
a car wash.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Windshield washer: Press the end
of the stalk:
2
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
1
0
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick press and hold: the
wipers will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long press and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on
the windshield. This feature can be enabled/disabled through the
message center. Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
Windshield wiper rainlamp feature (if equipped with autolamp)
When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight, and the
headlamp control is in the autolamp position, the exterior lamps will turn
on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off.
Rear window wiper/washer controls
For rear wiper operation, rotate the
rear window wiper and washer
control to the desired position.
2
Select:
1
0
2 — Intermittent operation
(shortest pause between wipes).
1 — Intermittent operation (longest
pause between wipes).
O (off) — Rear wiper and washer off.
For rear wash cycle, rotate (and hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer
control to either
position.
57

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
From either position, the control will automatically return to the 2 or O
(off) position.
Reverse wiper feature: The rear wiper will be automatically activated
in an intermittent setting when shifting into R (Reverse) if the front
wipers are activated. This feature may be enabled/disabled through the
message center. Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
TILT/TELESCOPE STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED)
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down to unlock the
steering column.
2. While the lever is in the down
position, move the steering wheel
up or down and in or out until you
find the desired position.
3. While holding the steering wheel
in place, pull the lever up to its
original position to lock the steering
column.
WARNING: Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is
moving.

Power tilt/telescope steering column (if equipped)
The steering column can be
adjusted using the control on the
side of the steering column. Press
and hold the front or rear of the
control to adjust the telescope.
Press and hold the top or bottom of
the control to adjust the tilt.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Easy entry/exit feature
When the ignition is turned off, the column will move to the full up and
in position if this feature is activated through the message center. Refer
to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter. When the ignition
is turned on, the column will return to the previous setting.
Note: The easy entry/exit feature will prevent the steering wheel from
returning to the memory position until the ignition is turned off.
Memory feature (if equipped)
The steering column positions are saved when doing a memory set
function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features
when a memory position is selected through the remote entry
transmitter, keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the instrument
panel. Refer to Front seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter.
If the steering column adjustment control is pressed during memory
recall it will cancel the automatic operation and the column will respond
to manual adjustment of the control.
WARNING: Never adjust the steering column when the vehicle
is moving.
On vehicles with memory feature, to prevent damage to the steering
column, the steering column is designed to set a stopping position just
short of the end of the column position. If the steering column
encounters an object while moving up or down, a new stopping position
will be set. To reset the steering column to its normal stopping position:
• After encountering the new stopping position, press the steering
column control again to override.
• Continue pressing the control until it reaches the end of the column
position.
• A new soft stop will be automatically set. The next time the steering
column is tilted it will stop just short of the end of the column
position.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamp.

Slide-on-rod feature
Rotate the visor towards the side
window and extend it rearward for
additional sunlight coverage.
Note: To stow the visor back into
the headliner, visor must be
retracted before moving it back
toward the windshield.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
Storage compartment
The storage compartment may be
used to store a pair of sunglasses.
Press the release area on the rear
edge of the bin door to open the
storage compartment. The door will
open to the full open position.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
CENTER CONSOLE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
1. Cupholders
1
2. Utility compartment with in-bin
2
power point and a removable coin
holder tray (two grooves on tray
slide onto tracks in main bin).
3. Rear power point

3
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12V DC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations:
• On the passenger side of the center console near the instrument panel
• In the center console storage compartment
• On the rear side of the center console, accessible from the rear seats
• On the left rear quarter panel, accessible from the liftgate or behind
the rear seat
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if
equipped).
Note: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette
lighter socket (if equipped). Improper use of the lighter can cause
damage not covered by your warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12V DC/180W. If the power point or cigar
lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and
relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on
checking and replacing fuses.
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
the battery from being discharged:
• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Press and pull the window switches
to open and close windows.
• Press down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
Rear Window Buffeting: When one or both of the rear windows are
open, the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise. This
noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately
2–3 inches (5–8 cm).
One-touch up or down (front windows only)
This feature allows the driver or passenger’s window to open or close
fully without holding the control down.
62

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
To operate one-touch down, press the switch completely down to the
second detent and release quickly. The window will open fully.
Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window
operation.
To operate one-touch up, pull the switch completely up to the second
detent and release quickly. The window will close fully. Momentarily
press the switch to any position to stop the window operation.
Global open windows
Press and hold
to begin opening the two front windows and venting
the panoramic roof (if equipped).
control can then be released and the windows and panoramic
• The
roof will complete the opening operation.
or
is pressed during the opening operation, both windows
• If
and panoramic roof movement will stop.
Note: The ignition must be off and the accessory delay feature must be
not activated in order for this feature to operate.
Note: This feature can be disabled or enabled by your authorized dealer
or through the message center. Refer to Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter.
Bounce-back
When the window is moving upward and an obstacle or a rough road
condition interferes with the window’s movement, the window will
automatically reverse direction and move down. This is known as
“bounce-back”. If the ignition is turned off (without accessory delay
being active) during bounce-back, the window will move down until the
bounce-back position is reached.
Security override
To override a bounce-back condition, within two seconds after the
window reaches the bounce-back position, pull and hold the switch up
and the window will travel up with no bounce-back or pinch
protection. If the switch is released before the window is fully closed,
the window will stop. For example, this can be used to overcome the
resistance of ice on the window or seals.
63

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver and front passenger to
operate the power windows.
To lock out all the window controls
(except for the driver and front
passenger) press the right side of
the control. Press the left side to
restore the window controls.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the audio system, power windows and moon roof
(if equipped) operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off
or until either front door is opened.
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side.
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror
The interior rear view mirror and a driver’s side exterior mirror have an
auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirrors will change from
the normal (high reflective) state to the non-glare (darkened) state
when bright lights (glare) reach the interior mirror. When the interior
mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle, the interior rear view
mirror and the driver’s side exterior mirror will automatically adjust
(darken) to minimize glare.
The mirrors will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior
rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror
performance.
Note: A rear center passenger and/or raised rear center headrest (if
equipped) may also block the light from reaching the sensor.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
64

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Memory feature
The power side view mirror positions are saved when doing a memory
set and can be recalled using the memory feature. Refer to Front seats
in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
Automatic dimming feature
The driver’s side view mirror has an auto-dimming function. For more
information, refer to Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror in
this chapter.
Heated outside mirrors
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
65

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Fold-away mirrors
Fold the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.

Blind spot mirrors (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with blind spot mirrors or a blind spot
information system. Refer to Blind spot mirrors or Blind spot
information system (BLIS威) with cross traffic alert (CTA) in the
Driving chapter.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Using speed control
The speed controls are located on the steering wheel. The following
buttons work with speed control:
SET: Press to set a speed or to
increase or decrease the set speed.
RES (Resume): Press to resume
the set speed.
CNCL (Cancel): Press to cancel
the set speed.
ON/OFF: Press to turn speed
control on or off.
Setting speed control
To set speed control:
1. Press ON upward and release.
66

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press SET upward and release.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
5. The indicator

light on the instrument cluster will turn on.

Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control, press the brake pedal or press and
release CNCL. Disengaging the speed control will not erase the previous
set speed.
Resuming a set speed
Press and release RES. This will automatically return the vehicle to the
previously set speed.
Increasing speed while using speed control
To set a higher speed:
• Press SET upward and hold until you get to the desired speed, then
release. You can also use SET to operate the tap-up function. Press
SET upward and release to increase the vehicle set speed in 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) increments.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed then press SET
upward and release.
Reducing speed while using speed control
To reduce a set speed:
• Press SET downward and hold until you get to the desired speed,
then release. You can also use SET to operate the tap-down function.
Press SET downward and release to decrease the vehicle set speed in
1 mph (1.6 km/h) increments.
• Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached then
press SET downward and release.
67

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Turning off speed control
To turn off the speed control, press OFF downward or turn off the
ignition.
Note: When you turn off the speed control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) (IF EQUIPPED)
Adaptive cruise control (ACC) is much like speed control, only this
system is designed to automatically adjust your speed to maintain a
proper distance between you and the vehicle in front of you in the same
lane. The driver can select from one of four GAP settings, the controls
are located on the steering wheel.
At startup, the system sets the gap
to the last selected setting. Once
activated, the driver can deactivate
the system at any time by pressing
the brake pedal, pressing the
steering wheel ON/OFF control or pressing the RES/CNCL control. In
addition, the driver can temporarily increase the vehicle speed above the
current speed by manually pressing on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Always pay close attention to changing road
conditions, especially when using adaptive cruise control.
Adaptive cruise control cannot replace attentive driving. Failing to
follow any of the warnings below or failing to pay attention to the road
may result in a collision, serious injury or death.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control is not a collision warning or
avoidance system. Additionally, adaptive cruise control will not
detect:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
WARNING: Do not use the adaptive cruise control when
entering or leaving a highway, in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
68

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
WARNING: Do not use in poor visibility, specifically fog, rain,
spray or snow.
Using adaptive cruise control
Note: It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in
control of the vehicle at all times.
The controls for using your cruise
control are located on the steering
wheel.
RES
SET: Press to set a speed or to
CNCL
change the set speed.
SET
GAP
RES/CNCL (Resume/cancel):
ON
Press to resume or cancel a set
OFF
speed.
ON/OFF: Press to turn the system
on or off.
GAP: Press to change the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you.
Setting adaptive cruise control
1. Press and release ON. The
message center will display the
ACC indicator light, current
gray
gap setting and SET.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press SET upward and release.
The vehicle speed will be stored in the memory and the message center
ACC indicator light, current gap setting and
will display a green
desired set speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
5. A lead vehicle graphic will
illuminate if there is a vehicle
detected in front of you.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Following a vehicle
WARNING: When following a vehicle in front of you, the vehicle
will not decelerate automatically to a stop, nor will the vehicle
always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a collision without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so
may result in a collision, serious injury or death.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is
ahead in the same lane, the vehicle speed will adjust automatically to
maintain a preset gap distance. The distance setting is adjustable, refer
to Setting the gap distance in this section.
The lead vehicle graphic will be illuminated.
The vehicle will maintain a constant distance between the vehicle ahead
until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out of your lane or out of view.
• The vehicle speed falls below 16 mph (26 km/h).
• A new gap distance is set.
The vehicle brakes will be automatically applied to slow the vehicle to
maintain a safe distance between the vehicle in front. The maximum
braking which is applied by the ACC system is limited and can be
overridden by the driver applying the brakes.
If the ACC system predicts that its
maximum braking level will not be
sufficient, an audible warning will
sound while the ACC continues to
brake. This is accompanied by a
heads-up display; a red warning bar
illuminating on the windshield. The driver should take immediate
action.
Note: The brakes may emit a sound when they are being modulated by
the adaptive cruise control system.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles
detected by the radar sensor. In some cases there may be no
warning or the warning may be delayed. The driver should always
apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
collision, serious injury or death.
70

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Setting the gap distance
The distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you can
be decreased or increased by
pressing the GAP control up or
down. The selected gap will be
displayed in the message center as shown by the bars in the graphic.
Four gap distance settings are available.
Graphic
Following
Following
Dynamic
display (bars
distance
distance at
behavior
between
60 mph
vehicles)
(100 km/h)
1 bar
1 second
29 yards (28 m) Sporty
2 bars
1.5 seconds
44 yards (42 m) Normal
3 bars
1.9 seconds
56 yards (53 m) Normal
4 bars
2.3 seconds
66 yards (64 m) Comfort
Each time the vehicle is restarted, the last chosen gap for the current
driver will be automatically selected.
Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the
driving conditions.
Disengaging adaptive cruise control
Press the brake pedal or press CNCL to disengage the adaptive cruise
control. The last set speed will be displayed with a strikethrough.
Disengaging the adaptive cruise control will not erase your previous set
speed.
Overriding adaptive cruise control
WARNING: Whenever the driver is overriding the ACC by
pressing the accelerator pedal, the ACC will not automatically
apply the brakes to maintain separation from any vehicle ahead.
The set speed and gap distance can be overridden by pressing the
accelerator pedal.
When the driver is overriding ACC, the green
ACC light is
illuminated, and the follow vehicle is not displayed in the message
center. When the accelerator is released, the ACC function will operate
again and vehicle speed will decrease to the set speed, or a lower speed
if following a slower vehicle.
71

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Changing the set speed
There are three ways to change the set speed:
• Accelerate or brake to the desired speed and press SET upward and
release.
• Increase or decrease the speed by holding SET upward or downward
until the desired set speed is shown on the message center. The
vehicle speed will gradually change to the selected speed.
• Increase or decrease the speed in increments of 1 mph (2 km/h) by
briefly pressing the SET upward or downward.
The ACC may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle down to the new set
speed. The set speed will display continuously in the message center
while ACC is active.
Resuming the set speed
Press and release RES/CNCL. This will automatically return the vehicle
to the previously set speed. The set speed will display continuously in
the message center while ACC is active.
Note: Resume should only be used if the driver is aware of the set speed
and intends to return to it.
Low speed automatic cancellation
ACC is not functional at vehicle speeds below 16 mph (26 km/h). Once
the vehicle speed drops below 16 mph (26 km/h), an audible alarm will
sound and the automatic braking will be released.
Hilly condition usage
It is recommended that the driver select a lower gear position when ACC
is active in situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades
(i.e., driving in mountainous areas). In these situations, additional engine
braking is needed to reduce the load on the vehicle’s regular brake
system to prevent them from overheating. For more information,
reference Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter.
Note: If ACC is applying brakes for an extended period of time, an
audible alarm will sound and ACC will shut down. This is to allow the
brakes to cool down. When the brakes have cooled down, the ACC will
again function normally.
Turning off cruise control
Press OFF to turn off the cruise control.
Note: When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your cruise
control set speed memory is erased.
72

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Detection issues
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations it may
not detect vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected.
Detection issues can occur:

• When driving on a different line than the vehicle in front.

• With vehicles that edge into your lane. These vehicles can only be
detected once they have moved fully into your lane.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls

• There may be issues with the detection of vehicles in front when
driving into and coming out of a bend or curve in the road.
In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver should
stay alert and intervene when necessary.
ACC Not Available
Several conditions exist which can cause ACC to deactivate or prevent
ACC from activating when requested. These conditions include:
• The sensor is blocked, refer to Blocked sensor in this section.
• Brake temperature is high, refer to Hilly condition usage in this
section.
• A failure has occurred in the ACC system or related system.
Blocked sensor
If a message regarding a blocked
sensor is displayed, the radar signals
from the sensor have been
obstructed. The sensor is located
behind a fascia cover near the driver
side of the lower grille. When the
radar signals are obstructed, a
vehicle ahead cannot be detected
and the ACC will not function. The
following table lists possible causes
and actions for this message being
displayed.
74

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Cause
The surface of the radar in the
grille is dirty or obstructed in
some way
The surface of the radar in the
grille is clean but the message
remains in the display
Heavy rain or snow is interfering
with the radar signals
Swirling water, or snow or ice on
the surface of the road may
interfere with the radar signals

Action
Clean the grille surface in front of
the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction
Wait a short time. It may take
several minutes for the radar to
detect that it is no longer
obstructed
Do not use ACC in these condition
because it may not detect, warn,
or respond to potential collisions.
Do not use ACC in these condition
because it may not detect, warn,
or respond to potential collisions.

WARNING: Do not use ACC when towing a trailer with brake
controls. Aftermarket trailer brakes will not function properly
when ACC is activated because the brakes are electronically controlled.
Failing to do so may result in loss of vehicle control, which could result
in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not use tires sizes other than those
recommended because this can affect the normal operation of
ACC. Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury.
Switching to normal cruise control
You can manually change from adaptive cruise control (ACC) to normal
cruise control through the message center. Refer to Message center in
the Instrument Cluster chapter. If normal cruise control is selected, the
ACC indicator light will be replaced with a
cruise control indicator
light. The gap setting will not be displayed, the system will not
automatically respond to lead vehicles and automatic braking will not be
activated. The system will default to ACC when the engine is started.
WARNING: Normal cruise control will not brake due to slower
vehicles. Always be aware of which mode is selected and apply
the brakes when necessary.
75

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
Audio control features
SEEK: Press up or down to select
the next/previous radio station
preset, CD track or satellite radio (if
equipped) channel preset depending
MEDIA
on which media mode you are in.
MEDIA: Press repeatedly to scroll
SEEK
through available audio modes.
MUTE
MUTE: Press to silence the radio.
VOL (Volume): Press up or down
to increase or decrease the volume.
Navigation/SYNC威 system hands-free control features (if
equipped)
to active the voice
Press
recognition feature. Refer to Voice
recognition feature in the MyFord
Touch™ / MyLincoln Touch™
supplement.
to access phone features.
Press
Refer to Phone features in the
MyFord Touch™ / MyLincoln
Touch™ supplement.
Cluster display control features
Some features can be adjusted
through the right side of the cluster
display. Use the right steering wheel
control to navigate the screen and
press OK to select. The following
features are available:
• Entertainment
• Change audio source
• Limited play list
• Navigation (if equipped)
• Redundant center stack display
• Routed map
76

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

VOL

SEEK

Driver Controls
• Phone
• Redundant center stack display
• Favorite contacts
• Climate
• On
• Fan speed
• Temperature
PANORAMIC VISTA ROOF™ AND POWER SUNSHADES
(IF EQUIPPED)
The panoramic Vista Roof™ and power sunshade controls are located on
the overhead console.
WARNING: Do not let children play with the panoramic Vista
Roof™ and power sunshade or leave children unattended in the
vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.
WARNING: When closing the panoramic Vista Roof™ and
power sunshade, you should verify that it is free of obstructions
and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the proximity of the
panoramic Vista Roof™ and power sunshade opening.
Note: Do not attempt to move the panoramic power sunshades manually
or sunshade damage or malfunction may occur. The sunshade track clips
are designed to release the sunshade crossbar in order to prevent
damage to the system. If this occurs the sunshade crossbar ends may
just need to be slid back into position to regain proper function. See
your authorized dealer for proper panoramic Vista Roof™ or sunshade
operating, diagnostic or repair instructions.
control operates both the sunshades and the
Note: The same
panoramic Vista Roof™.
The panoramic Vista Roof™ and power sunshade are equipped with an
automatic, one-touch, express opening feature. To stop motion at any
time during the one-touch operation, press the control a second time.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
To open power sunshades and
panoramic Vista Roof™: Press
and release the
control to
open the sunshade. The front and
rear sunshades open simultaneously.
Note: Vista Roof™ will only open
after power sunshades are
completely open. Power sunshades
will only close after Vista Roof™ is completely closed.
control.
To open the panoramic Vista Roof™ press and release the
The panoramic Vista Roof™ will open to the “comfort” position. Press
and release the control again to fully open. To stop the one-touch open
feature press the control again.
Note: The “comfort” position helps to alleviate rumbling wind noise
which may happen in the vehicle with the roof fully opened.
To close the panoramic Vista Roof™ and power sunshades: Pull
control down and release. The glass panel will stop at the
the
“express close” position. Firmly pull the control again and hold to fully
close the Vista Roof™. Pull the control down and release to close the
sunshades to the “express close” position. Firmly pull the control again
and hold to fully close the front and rear sunshades.
To vent the panoramic Vista
Roof™: From the closed position,
press and release the TILT control.
To close, pull and hold the TILT
control down.
Note: If the panoramic Vista Roof™
is excessively operated, the glass
and shade motors will automatically
go into a fail-safe jog mode (manual intermittent operation) to prevent
overheating and/or damage to the motor. The motors will revert back to
normal operation after a period of idle time.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a universal garage door opener which
can be used to replace the common hand-held transmitter.
HomeLink姞 Wireless Control System (if equipped)
The HomeLink威 Wireless Control
System, located on the driver’s visor,
provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This feature will learn the
radio frequency codes of most
transmitters to operate garage
doors, entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and
home or office lighting.
WARNING: When programming your HomeLink威 Wireless
Control System to a garage door or gate, be sure that people and
objects are out of the way to prevent potential injury or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink威 Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink威 at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink威 equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink威 buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program HomeLink威 with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
accessory position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink威.
It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink威 for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
79

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
1. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches
(2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink威
button you wish to program (located
on your visor) while keeping the
indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the chosen HomeLink威 and
hand-held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink威 indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release
both the HomeLink威 and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Note: Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to
replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian residents.
3. Firmly press and hold for five seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink威 button up to two separate times to activate the
door. If the door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink威 button and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed
and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a constant light continue with “Programming” Steps 4 through
6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device (most
commonly a garage door opener).
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and
color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink威 button. Repeat the
press/hold/release sequence again and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink威 should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink威 buttons begin with Step 1 in this section.
For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink威 at
www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
80

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink威 to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing Step 1 outlined in
the Programming section, replace
Step 2 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button (note Step 2 in the
Programming section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink威. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink威 accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with Step 3 in the Programming section.
Operating the HomeLink姞 Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink威 button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Erasing HomeLink姞 buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink威 buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink威 is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be
programmed at any time beginning with Step 1 in the Programming
section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞 button
To program a device to HomeLink威 using a HomeLink威 button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink威 button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT
WARNING: Do not install additional floor mats on top of the
factory installed floor mats as they may interfere with the
accelerator or the brake pedals.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Position the floor mat so that the
eyelets are over the retention posts
and press down to lock in. Make
sure that the mat does not interfere
with the operation of the accelerator
or the brake pedal. To remove the
floor mat, reverse the installation
procedure.

POWER LIFTGATE
You can power open or close the liftgate with the following controls:
• Instrument panel control button
• Transmitter button
• Outside liftgate control button
• Control button in the rear cargo area
Opening and closing the power liftgate:
WARNING: Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate
area before using the power liftgate control.
WARNING: Keep keys out of reach of children. Do not allow
children to play near an open or moving power liftgate.
The liftgate will only operate with the vehicle in P (Park).
When the liftgate is being power closed, a chime will sound three times
as the liftgate begins to power close. A single chime indicates a problem
with the close request, caused by:
• the ignition is on and the transmission is not in P (Park);
• or the battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage;
• or the vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the liftgate reverses and starts to close after an open request, a fast
continuous chime indicates excessive load on the gate or a possible strut
failure. If any excessive load is removed and you still have a faster
chime, have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
Do not attempt to manually force the liftgate to travel faster than the
power system will permit. This will activate the obstacle detection
feature.
83

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Note: Cycling the ignition prior to completely latching the liftgate could
result in damage to the liftgate and/or its power components. Make sure
the liftgate is fully latched before operating the vehicle.
Care should be exercised in starting the engine before the liftgate is fully
closed (latched). If the ignition is cycled during a liftgate power close
cycle and the liftgate is 6–10 inches (15–24 cm) from being latched, the
liftgate may reverse to the full open position. Verify that the gate is
closed before operating or moving the vehicle, especially in an enclosure,
like a garage or a parking structure. The liftgate or its components could
be damaged in an enclosure if the liftgate is open while the vehicle is
being operated.
When power operating the liftgate at temperatures below 32°F (0°C), the
liftgate may stop about 5 inches (12.7 cm) from the full open position.
The liftgate can be fully opened by pushing it upward to the maximum
open position.
The power liftgate feature can be enabled or disabled using the message
center controls. With the setting turned off, power operation is disabled
from the liftgate handle button and from the rear cargo area button. The
transmitter and instrument panel switch will still continue to operate the
liftgate regardless of the position state of the message center. Refer to
Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
To power open or close the
liftgate from the instrument
panel:
Press the button, located to the left
of the steering column, once to
power open or close the liftgate.
To power open or close the liftgate with the transmitter:
twice within three seconds to power open or close the liftgate.
Press
Refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
To power open the liftgate with
outside liftgate control button:
1. Unlock the liftgate with the
transmitter or power door unlock
control. If the intelligent access
transmitter is within 3 feet
(1 meter) of the liftgate, the liftgate
will unlock when you press the
liftgate release button.
2. To open the liftgate, press the
control button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle.
Note: For the best performance allow the power system to open the
liftgate after pressing the control. Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate
may activate the system’s obstacle detection feature and stop the power
operation.
To power close the liftgate with
the rear cargo area control
button:
Press and release the control on the
left rear quarter panel to close the
liftgate.
Note: The rear cargo area control
button is disabled when the liftgate
is latched.
WARNING: Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear
switch.
Note: The liftgate movement direction can be reversed with a second
press of the instrument panel, or the rear cargo area control button, or a
second double press of the transmitter button.
To manually operate the liftgate:
1. Disable the liftgate power function. Refer to Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter.
2. Open and close the liftgate as you would a standard liftgate. Refer to
Manual liftgate operation in this chapter.
Note: In case of operation in extreme cold -40°F (-40°C), or on extreme
inclines, manual operation of the liftgate is suggested.
85

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Obstacle detection:
The power liftgate system is equipped with an obstacle detection feature.
If the power liftgate is closing, the system will reverse to full open when
it detects an obstacle. A chime will sound three times when an obstacle
is detected as the liftgate begins to reopen. Once the obstacle is
removed, the liftgate can be closed under power.
If the power liftgate is opening, the system will stop and a chime will
sound three times when an obstacle is detected. Once the obstacle is
removed, the liftgate can again be operated normally.
Resetting the power liftgate:
The power liftgate may not operate properly and may need to be reset if
any of these conditions occur:
• a low voltage or dead battery
• disconnected battery
• the liftgate is manually closed and left ajar (unlatched)
To reset the power liftgate:
1. Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds then, reconnect the battery.
2. Manually close and fully latch the liftgate.
3. Power open the liftgate by using the transmitter, or the instrument
panel control button.
Note: If the power liftgate system is turned off in the message center,
the system cannot be activated with the outside release handle or rear
cargo area control button. The system will need to be turned on to
resume operation with the outside release handle or rear cargo area
control button. The power liftgate is still operational through the use of
the remote entry transmitter and instrument panel button when the
power liftgate is turned off in the message center.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Manual liftgate operation
The liftgate cargo area is only intended for cargo, not for passengers.
To open the liftgate, press the
button located in the top of the
liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch
the liftgate, then pull on the handle.
• Exercise care when opening or
closing the liftgate in a garage or
other enclosed area. The liftgate
could be damaged against a
garage door, low ceiling or wall.
• Do not hang anything (bike rack,
etc.) from the spoiler/glass or liftgate. Doing so could cause serious
damage to the liftgate and its components.
• Do not leave the liftgate open while driving. Doing so could cause
serious damage to the liftgate and its components as well as allowing
carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle.
WARNING: Make sure that the liftgate is closed to prevent
exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with
the liftgate door open, keep the vehicle well ventilated so outside air
comes into the vehicle.
Liftgate ajar signal
If the liftgate is not fully latched, you will receive a “LIFTGATE AJAR”
message on the instrument panel. If you see this message, check the
liftgate door to ensure it is fully latched.
Note: In the event of a power failure, the latch can be accessed and
released from the inside using the access panel on the liftgate trim.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo management system (if equipped)
The cargo management system
consists of storage compartments
located in the floor of the rear cargo
area.
1. To open, lift the release handle
and the lid.
2. To close, lower the lid.

Cargo net (if equipped)
The cargo net secures lightweight
objects in the cargo area. Attach the
net to the loops and anchors
provided.
WARNING: This net is not
designed to restrain objects
during a collision.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driver Controls
Utility hook
The utility hook can be used to
hang small items such as grocery
bags, etc. Do not hang more than
10 lb (4.5 kg) on the hook.

ROOF RACK SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Loads should never be placed directly on the roof panel. For proper
function of the roof rack system, loads must be placed directly on
crossbars affixed to the roof rack side rails. Your vehicle may be
equipped with factory-installed crossbars. Ford Genuine Accessory
crossbars, designed specifically for your vehicle, are also recommended
for use with your roof rack system.
The vehicle’s roof panel is NOT designed to directly carry a load. The
maximum recommended load is 100 lb (45 kg), evenly distributed
on the crossbars. Ensure that the load is securely fastened.
WARNING: When loading the roof rail crossbars, it is
recommended to evenly distribute the load, as well as maintain a
low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers of gravity,
may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken
when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
When the rail system is loaded, check the tightness of the load before
driving and at each fuel stop.
89

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
INTELLIGENT ACCESS KEY (IA KEY)
Your vehicle is equipped with two
intelligent access keys which
operate the power locks and the
remote start system. The IA key
must be in the vehicle to activate
the push button start system.

The IA key also contains a
removable mechanical key blade
that can be used to unlock the
driver door. To release the
mechanical key blade, slide the
release on the back of the
transmitter and pull the blade out.
Your IA keys are programmed to
your vehicle. You cannot enter or start your vehicle with an
unprogrammed key. If you lose one or both of your IA keys,
replacements are available from your authorized dealer. For more
information on programming replacement IA keys, refer to the
SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system section in this chapter.
Note: Your vehicle’s IA backup keys
were issued with a security tag that
provides important vehicle key cut
information. It is recommended that
you keep the tag in a safe place for
future reference.

MYKEY™
The MyKey™ feature allows you to program a restricted driving mode to
promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the
vehicle can be activated as a MyKey™. The key will remain restricted
until MyKey™ is cleared. Any remaining keys are referred to as an
“administrator key” or admin key. The admin key can be used to create a
MyKey™, program optional MyKey™ settings, and clear the MyKey™
90

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
feature. When the MyKey™ feature is enabled the user can use system
check in the message center to see how many MyKeys™ and admin keys
are programmed to the vehicle, and see the total distance the vehicle has
been driven with the MyKey™ active.
MyKey™ restricted features
Standard settings – these settings cannot be changed
• The audio system will be muted whenever Belt-Minder威 is activated
until the safety belts are buckled. Refer to the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for a detailed description of Belt-Minder威
operation.
• Low fuel warnings are displayed in the message center followed by a
chime when the distance to empty value reaches 75 miles (120 km).
• If equipped, any of the following: parking aid, Blind Spot Information
System (BLIS™) with cross traffic alert and forward collision warning
systems cannot be turned off.
Optional settings – these settings can be changed
• Vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph (130 km/h). Visual warnings are
displayed followed by a chime when the vehicle speed has reached
80 mph (130 km/h).
• Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when a preselected
vehicle speed of 45, 55 or 65 mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h) is exceeded.
• The maximum volume of the audio system is limited to 45%. MYKEY
VOLUME LIMITED will be displayed in the audio system display when
attempting to exceed the limited volume.
• The AdvanceTrac威 system cannot be turned off. When this optional
setting is on, the MyKey™ user will not be able to deactivate the
system. Note: It may be beneficial to deactivate the AdvanceTrac威
system if the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand.
Create a MyKey™
To program MyKey™ on one of the keys programmed to the vehicle, put
the intelligent access key in the backup slot with brand logo facing up;
see the Driving chapter for the location of the backup slot. Turn the
ignition on. Use the message center buttons to do the following:
1. Get into main menu, select SETTINGS then MYKEY by pressing OK
button or the right arrow button.
2. Press OK to select CREATE MYKEY.
3. Hold the OK button as prompted until you see a message that the key
is restricted.
91

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
MyKey™ is successfully programmed. Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the admin keys. Note: To program the optional
settings go to Step 2 in the Programming MyKey™ optional settings
section. If your vehicle is equipped with remote start, see the Using
MyKey™ with remote start systems section.
Note: All MyKeys™ can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was
created, otherwise an admin key is required to clear the MyKey™
programming. To clear all MyKeys™ go to Step 2 in the Clear MyKey™
section.
Programming MyKey™ optional settings
Turn the ignition on using an admin key. To program the optional
settings, use the message center buttons to do the following:
1. Get into main menu, select SETTINGS then MYKEY by pressing the
OK button or the right arrow button.
2. Use the up and down arrow buttons to get to any optional feature.
3. Press the right arrow button to bring up settings of each item.
4. Press OK button or right arrow button to make your choice.
Clear MyKey™
To reset all MyKeys™ as admin keys do the following:
1. At the main menu screen select SETTINGS then MYKEY by pressing
OK or the right arrow key.
2. Press the down arrow key to get to CLEAR MYKEYS.
3. Hold OK until you see ALL MYKEYS CLEARED.
Check MyKey™ system status
The vehicle’s message center information menu will provide the status of
the following MyKey™ parameters:
• MYKEY MILES (km) — This odometer only tracks distance when a
MyKey™ is used. If distance does not accumulate as expected, then
the MyKey™ is not being used by the intended user. The only way to
reset this odometer to zero is by clearing MyKey™. If this odometer is
lower than the last time you checked, then the MyKey™ system has
been recently cleared.
• # MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED — Indicates how many MyKeys™ are
programmed to the vehicle. Can be used to detect deletion of a
MyKey™.
• # ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED — Indicates how many admin keys
are programmed to the vehicle. Can be used to detect if an additional
spare key has been programmed to the vehicle.
92

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for MyKey™
system warnings displays.
Using MyKey™ with remote start systems
MyKey™ is not compatible with non Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system please see
your authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system.
The following information MAY help customers who choose to use a non
Ford-approved remote start system. The actions proved below do NOT
make MyKey™ compatible with non Ford-approved remote start system,
but it MAY help you to retain some MyKey™ functions.
Vehicles equipped with an intelligent access key (push button
start)
• It is not possible to program any remote start system as MyKey™ on
vehicles equipped with intelligent access key (push button start).
Therefore, you should treat the remote start fob as you would any
other admin key. When the vehicle is started using remote start, the
system will stall the engine when you either enter the vehicle or shift
the vehicle into gear. Prior to the engine stall, the vehicle will have
administrative privileges. When you restart the engine, the vehicle will
identify the user as an admin or MyKey™ drive depending on the
settings of the actual key used to start the vehicle.
Note: For all vehicles, the number of MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or
ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey™ system
status menus will include the non Ford-approved remote start system as
an additional key in the total count. See the Check MyKey™ system
status section.
Note: For all vehicles with a non Ford-approved remote start installed, it
is possible to program all ’real’ keys as MyKeys™, in which case, you will
need to use your remote start system to reset all MyKeys™ as admin
keys by doing the following:
1. Enter the vehicle, close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using your non Ford-approved remote start
fob.
3. Follow Steps 1-4 in the Clear MyKey™ section.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Troubleshooting
Condition
Can’t create a MyKey™

Cannot program the MyKey™
optional settings

Cannot clear MyKey™

Lost the only admin key

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Potential Causes
• Key in backup slot is the last
remaining admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
• Key in backup slot is a MyKey™.
• Key is not in the backup slot.
• SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft
system is disabled or in unlimited
mode.
• Vehicle has been started using a
non Ford-approved remote start
system that is programmed as
MyKey™. Refer to Using MyKey™
with remote start systems section.
• Key in backup slot is a MyKey™.
• No MyKeys™ are programmed to
the vehicle. Refer to Create a
MyKey™ section.
• Vehicle has been started using a
non Ford-approved remote start
system that is programmed as
MyKey™. Refer to Using MyKey™
with remote start systems section.
• No MyKeys™ are programmed to
the vehicle. Refer to Create a
MyKey™ section.
• Vehicle has been started using a
non Ford-approved remote start
system that is programmed as
MyKey™. Refer to Using MyKey™
with remote start systems section.
• Purchase a new key from your
authorized dealer.

Locks and Security
Condition
Lost any key

I accidentally programmed all
keys as MyKeys™

No MyKey™ function

MyKey™ programmed total
includes one additional key

Admin keys programmed total
includes one additional key

Potential Causes
• For programming spare keys, refer
to the Programming spare keys
section in this chapter.
• Vehicle has a non Ford-approved
remote start system that is recognized
as an admin key. Refer to the Using
MyKey™ with remote start systems
section to reset all MyKeys™ as
admin keys.
• An admin intelligent access key is
present.
• No MyKeys™ are programmed to
the vehicle. Refer to Create a
MyKey™ section.
• Vehicle has been started using a
non Ford-approved remote start
system (as an admin key) then a
MyKey™ is inserted without restarting
the engine.
• Unknown key has been programmed
to the vehicle as a MyKey™.
• Vehicle is equipped with a non
Ford-approved remote start system.
Refer to Using MyKey™ with remote
start systems section.
• Unknown key has been programmed
to the vehicle as admin key.
• Vehicle is equipped with a non
Ford-approved remote start system.
Refer to Using MyKey™ with remote
start systems section.

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Condition
MyKey™ distance does not
accumulate

Potential Causes
• MyKey™ is not being used by the
intended user.
• MyKey™ system has been recently
cleared.
• Vehicles has been remote started
using a non Ford-approved remote
start system (as if an admin key) then
a MyKey™ is inserted without
recycling the MyKey™ in ignition.

POWER DOOR LOCKS
• Press the
doors.

control to unlock all

• Press the
doors.

control to lock all

Smart unlocks
The smart unlock feature is intended to prevent you from unintentionally
locking your IA key inside your vehicle’s passenger compartment or rear
cargo area.
When you lock your vehicle using the driver or passenger power door
lock control (with the door open, vehicle in park and ignition off), after
you close the door the vehicle will search for an IA key in the passenger
compartment. If an IA key is found inside the vehicle, all of the doors
will immediately unlock and the horn will chirp, indicating that the IA
key is inside.
In order to override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the
IA key inside the vehicle, you can lock your vehicle after all doors are
closed by using your keyless entry keypad, pressing the
control on
another IA key or touching the locking area on the handle with another
IA key in your hand. Refer to Keyless entry system in this chapter for
more information on keyless entry keypad operation.
96

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
When you open one of the front doors and you lock the vehicle using the
driver or passenger power door lock control (with the vehicle not in P
(Park) and the ignition off, or the ignition on), all doors will lock, then
all doors will automatically unlock reminding you that the vehicle is not
in P (Park) or the ignition is on.
Autolock feature (if enabled)
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition is on,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is on and the vehicle
speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Deactivating/activating autolock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature activated; there are three
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• using a keypad procedure, or
• by using the instrument cluster message center. Refer to Message
center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Keyless entry keypad autolock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4 press the 7 • 8.
5. Release the 7 • 8.
6. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
97

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Autounlock feature (if enabled)
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is on, all the doors are closed, and the vehicle has been in
motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned off or to
accessory; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
turned off or to accessory.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked after the ignition is turned off and before the driver
door is opened.
Deactivating/activating autounlock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autounlock feature activated; there are three
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• using a keypad procedure, or
• or by using the instrument cluster message center. Refer to Message
center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
Keyless entry keypad autounlock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4, press and release
the 7 • 8. While still holding the 3 • 4, press and release the 7 • 8 a
second time.
5. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
98

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the
childproof door locks are set, but
the doors are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
the rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
• Insert the key and turn to the
lock position (key horizontal) to
engage the childproof locks.
• Insert the key and turn to the
unlock position (key vertical) to disengage the childproof locks.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
The intelligent access keys (IA key) comply with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters) unless equipped with remote start, which allows for greater
range performance. A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The transmitter allows you to:
• remotely unlock the vehicle doors

.
99

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
• remotely lock all the vehicle doors
• remotely open the power liftgate

.
.

• remotely start/stop the vehicle
. Refer to Remote start later in this
section.
• activate the personal alarm
.
• arm and disarm the perimeter anti-theft system.
• operate the illuminated entry feature.
• activate the global opening windows feature (if equipped).
Refer to Intelligent access in this section for more features.
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position
except while the vehicle is in the start position. The panic feature
operates with the ignition off.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL intelligent access keys with you to the authorized dealer in order
to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Intelligent access
Your intelligent access system uses a radio frequency (RF) signal to
communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock
when commanded (either by touching the inside of the driver or front
passenger exterior door handle, by activating the exterior power liftgate
button, or a button on the transmitter itself). If excessive RF
interference is present in the area, or if your transmitter battery is low, it
may be necessary to mechanically unlock your door. The mechanical key
blade in your IA key can be used to open the driver’s door in this
situation (refer to Intelligent access key in this chapter for more
information on the location and use of the mechanical key blade).
Your vehicle will allow you to unlock and enter your vehicle without
actively using a key or transmitter. You can use the intelligent access
feature at the front doors or at the liftgate. You can activate the
intelligent access feature as long as you have one of your IA keys within
range of the front doors or the liftgate.
Activating intelligent access at the front doors: If your IA key is
within 3 feet (1 meter) of the front doors you can activate your
intelligent access system by pulling a front exterior door handle. The
door(s) will automatically unlock and the door can be opened.
To lock the doors, press and hold for half a second the lock area on
either front door handle (black button on chrome handled doors or the
small bump on painted door handles).
100

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Activating intelligent access at the liftgate: If your IA key is within
3 feet (1 meter) of the liftgate, you can activate your intelligent access
system by pressing the exterior liftgate release button on the top of the
liftgate pull-cup handle. The liftgate will release and open.
Push button start: The push button start system allows you to start
your vehicle without using a key. Refer to Push button start system in
the Driving chapter.
Unlocking the doors/two stage unlock
1. Press
and release to unlock the driver’s door.
Note: The interior lamps and turn signal lamps will illuminate.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to unlock all the
doors. The turn signals will flash.
The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature; this
feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned
on.
The battery saver feature will turn off the lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned off.
Two stage unlocking may be disabled or re-enabled by simultaneously
pressing the
and
controls on the transmitter for four seconds
(disabling two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock
simultaneously). The turn signal lamps will illuminate twice to indicate
that two-stage unlock was enabled or disabled.
If equipped with an IA key, when two stage unlocking is disabled,
intelligent access at the driver’s door results in an unlock of all doors
(not just the driver door).
Locking the doors
1. Press
and release to lock all the doors. The turn signal lamps will
illuminate.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all
the doors are closed. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp
and the turn lamps will illuminate if all the doors and liftgate are closed.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is not closed, or if the hood is not
closed on vehicles equipped with a perimeter alarm or remote start, the
horn will chirp twice and the lamps will not flash.
Car finder
Press
twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
101

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Sounding a panic alarm
to activate the alarm. Press again or turn the ignition to on to
Press
deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off.
Opening the power liftgate
Press
liftgate.

twice within three seconds to fully unlatch and open the

WARNING: Make sure all persons are clear of the liftgate area
before using power liftgate control.
In order to fully lower and latch the liftgate, press the control twice.
If the liftgate stops mid-travel, it may have detected an obstacle. Check
to ensure the liftgate swing zone is free from obstruction and reset the
power assist by manually closing the liftgate. Normal operation can then
twice
be resumed. Liftgate open/close can be reversed by pressing
within three seconds.
WARNING: Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust
fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the
liftgate open, keep the vents open so outside air comes into the
vehicle.
Memory feature (seat, mirrors and steering column)
The intelligent access key (IA key) allows you to recall the memory
seat/power mirrors/steering column feature.
to automatically move the seat, power mirrors and steering
Press
column to the desired memory position. The mirrors will move to the
programmed position and the seat will move to the easy entry position.
The seat will move to the final position when the ignition is switched out
of off (if easy entry feature is enabled).

102

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Programming the memory feature to the transmitter
To activate this feature:
1. Move the driver seat, power mirrors and steering column to the
desired positions using the associated controls.
2. Press and hold button 1 for five
seconds. A tone will be heard after
about two seconds confirming
memory position has been set.
Continue to hold until a second tone
is heard after five seconds.
3. Within three seconds press
4. Wait 10 seconds, then press

.
.

5. Repeat this procedure for
memory 2 and another transmitter if
desired.
Deprogramming the memory feature from the transmitter
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press and hold either the 1 or 2 button for five seconds. A tone will be
heard after 11⁄2 seconds when the memory store is done, continue to
hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds.
2. Within three seconds press the

3. Repeat this procedure for each additional transmitter if desired.
Memory profiles
The memory feature also coordinates with user-created profile settings
utilizing the infotainment touchscreen system (if equipped). See the
Creating a user profile section in the MyLincoln Touch™ supplement
for more information.

103

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Replacing the battery
The intelligent access key (IA key) uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the backup key from the
transmitter, then twist a thin coin in
the slot hidden behind the backup
key slot to remove the battery
cover.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on
the battery terminals or on the back
surface of the circuit board.

2. Remove the old battery.
Note: Please refer to local
regulations when disposing of
transmitter batteries.
3. Insert the new battery. Refer to
the instructions inside the IA key
for the correct orientation of the
battery. Press the battery down to
ensure that the battery is fully
seated in the battery housing cavity.
4. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter and install the
backup key.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT or IA key to
become de-programmed from your vehicle. They should operate normally
after battery replacement.
Replacing lost intelligent access keys (IA keys)
If you would like to have your IA keys reprogrammed because you lost
one, or would like to buy additional transmitters you can either
reprogram them yourself, or take all transmitters to your authorized
dealer for reprogramming.
How to reprogram your intelligent access keys (IA keys)
To program new IA keys yourself, refer to SecuriLock威 passive
anti-theft system in this chapter. Note: At least two already
programmed transmitters are required to perform this procedure
yourself.
104

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps, parking lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped)
illuminate when the IA key or the keyless entry keypad is used to unlock
the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if:
• the ignition is turned on, or
• the
control on the transmitter is pressed, or
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad, or
• the vehicle is locked using the key in the driver door cylinder, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
Illuminated exit
When all vehicle doors are closed and the ignition is turned off, the
interior dome lamps, parking lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped) will
illuminate.
The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and
• 25 seconds elapse, or
• the start button is pressed.
Battery saver
The battery saver will shut off the lamps 10 minutes after the ignition
has been turned off.
• If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control, the
battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been
turned off.
• If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors
or the trunk was opened, the battery saver will shut them off
10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
• The battery saver will shut off the headlamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned off.
Accessory mode battery saver for intelligent access keys with
push button start
If you shut off the engine and leave the ignition in the on or accessory
mode, the ignition will shut off after 30 minutes.
105

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Remote start
The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside the
vehicle. If your transmitter has a
icon, you have remote start. The
remote start feature has an extended operating range which allows you
to remote start your vehicle from a farther distance from your vehicle.
All the buttons have this increased range performance capability when
equipped with remote start.
Vehicles with automatic climate control can be configured to operate
when the vehicle is started. Refer to Remote start climate operation in
the Climate Controls chapter for more information and also refer to
Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter to learn how to
enable different climate options. A manual climate control system will
run at the setting it was set to when the vehicle was last turned off.
To help make the vehicle as comfortable as possible, the engine idle can
be increased during a remote start. You can enable or disable engine idle
increase by selecting Remote Start Quiet in the message center. Refer to
Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding remote start systems.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel.
WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use remote start if
your vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well
ventilated.
The remote start system will not work if:
• The ignition is on.
• The alarm system is triggered.
• The feature has been disabled.
• The hood is not closed.
• Two remote vehicle starts have already been attempted within the last
hour.
• The vehicle is not in P (Park).
• The vehicle battery voltage is too low.

106

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Starting the engine with remote start
The remote start label on your transmitter details the engine starting
procedure. To start the engine using remote start:
Note: Each button press must be done within three seconds of each
other. If this sequence is not followed, the vehicle will not remote start
and the horn will not chirp.
1. Press

to lock all the doors.

two times. The exterior
2. Press
lamps will flash twice.

If for some reason, the system fails to start, the horn will chirp.
Note: If the vehicle has been remote started, you must press the
START/STOP button on the instrument panel once while applying the
brake pedal before driving the vehicle.
The power windows will be inhibited during the remote start and the
radio will not turn on.
The parking lamps will remain on and the engine will run for 5, 10, or
15 minutes, depending on how you programmed the system. To select
the duration of the remote start system refer to Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter.
Extending the engine run time
To keep the engine running for another remote start duration, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 with the engine still running. If you programmed the
duration to last 10 minutes, the second 10 minutes will begin
immediately so that, for example, if the vehicle had been running from
the first remote start for five minutes, the engine will continue to run for
a total of 15 minutes. You can only extend the remote start once.
The ignition must be turned on and then back off or allow one hour to
pass before using remote start again if additional remote starts are
desired.
Turning the engine off after using remote start
• Press

one time. The parking lamps will turn off.

You may have to be closer to the vehicle than when starting due to
ground reflection and the added noise of the running engine.
107

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
You can disable or enable the remote start system through the message
center. Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to:
• lock or unlock the doors without
using a key.
• recall memory seat/power mirrors
positions.
• enable/disable autolock and autounlock.
• program/erase user codes.
• arm/disarm the perimeter alarm system.
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5-digit entry code; this
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is
available from your authorized dealer. You can also create up to five of
your own 5-digit personal entry codes.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to
memory feature
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. For memory recall feature, enter the sixth digit 1 • 2 to store driver 1
settings or 3 • 4 to store driver 2 settings.
Note: Pressing 5 • 6, 7 • 8, or 9 • 0 keypad numbers as a sixth digit
will not recall a driver memory setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a memory setting.
5. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that your personal entry
code has been programmed to the module.
You may also program a personal entry code through the MyFord
Touch™ / MyLincoln Touch™ system (if equipped). Refer to the MyFord
Touch™ / MyLincoln Touch™ supplement.
108

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Within five seconds, press the 1 • 2 on the keypad and release.
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Anti-scan feature
If the wrong code has been entered seven times (35 consecutive button
presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
• pressing the
control on the transmitter.
• the ignition is turned on.
• unlocking the vehicle using intelligent access.
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate. Note: If the two-stage unlocking
feature is disabled, all doors will unlock; for more information regarding
two-stage unlocking, refer to the Unlocking the doors/Two stage unlock
section earlier in this chapter.
To unlock all doors, enter the factory set code or your personal code,
then press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press and hold the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same
time (with the driver’s door closed). You do not need to enter the
keypad code first.
To enable/disable autolock/autounlock, refer to Autolock feature or
Autounlock feature earlier in this chapter.
109

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
SECURILOCK姞 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless an intelligent access key programmed to your vehicle
is used. The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start”
condition. The message center will display: STARTING SYSTEM
FAULT.
Your vehicle comes with two intelligent access keys; additional units may
be purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can
program these to your vehicle or you can program then yourself. Refer to
Programming spare intelligent access keys for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always
take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after turning the ignition off.
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key disarms the vehicle.
Replacement of intelligent access keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two intelligent access keys.
The intelligent access key functions as both a programmed key that
operates the driver door lock, activates intelligent access with push
button start systems as well as a remote keyless entry transmitter. A
maximum of four intelligent access keys can be programmed to your
vehicle.
110

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
If your intelligent access key are lost or stolen and you don’t have an
extra key, you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer. The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new keys
will need to be programmed.
Replacing intelligent access keys can be very costly. Store an extra
programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase
additional spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare intelligent access keys
You must have two previously programmed intelligent access keys inside
the vehicle and the new unprogrammed intelligent access keys readily
accessible. If two previously programmed keys are not available, you
must take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare
key(s) programmed.
Note: A maximum of four intelligent access keys can be programmed to
your vehicle. If you would like to replace a previously programmed
access key with a new access key, or if you already have four access keys
programmed to your vehicle, you must take your vehicle and all access
keys to your authorized dealer to be erased and reprogrammed.
Ensure that the vehicle is off before beginning this procedure. Ensure
that all doors are closed before beginning this procedure and that all
doors remain closed throughout the procedure. Perform this procedure
exactly as described below, and perform all steps within 30 seconds of
starting the sequence. If any steps are performed out of sequence, stop
and wait for at least one minute before starting again.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Place the new unprogrammed intelligent access key in the pocket
inside the center console utility compartment.
2. Press the driver or passenger power door unlock control three times.
3. Press and release the brake pedal one time.
4. Press the driver or passenger power door lock control three times.
5. Press and release the brake pedal one time. The indicator on the
Start/Stop button should begin to rapidly flash, indicating that
programming mode has been entered and two programmed intelligent
access keys have been detected in the vehicle.

111

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Locks and Security
6. Within one minute, press the start/stop button. A message will be
displayed on the message center indicating that the new intelligent
access key was programmed. If four intelligent access keys have already
been programmed to your vehicle, you cannot program anymore and the
message MAX # OF KEYS LEARNED will be displayed on the message
center.
7. Remove intelligent access key from utility compartment pocket and
press the
control on the newly programmed intelligent access keys to
exit programming mode.
8. Verify that the remote entry functions operate (press lock then
unlock, making sure you end in unlock) and that the vehicle starts with
new intelligent access key.
If the intelligent access key has been successfully programmed, it can be
used to activate the intelligent access with push button start feature and
can be used to start your vehicle.
Note: To program MyKey™ features, refer to MyKey™ in this chapter.
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
The perimeter alarm system will warn you in case of unauthorized entry
to your vehicle.
When the following types of unauthorized entry occur:
• any door, the hood or the liftgate/trunk is opened without using the
keypad, the remote entry transmitter or the intelligent access
transmitter,
• or if the ignition is turned on when using an invalid key,
the perimeter alarm will flash the turn signal lamps and sound the horn
up to a total of 10 times.
ARMING THE SYSTEM
The system is ready to arm whenever the ignition is off. To arm the
system, do one of the following:
• Press the

control on the remote entry transmitter.

control twice on the remote entry
Note: If you press the
transmitter within three seconds, the horn will chirp once to let you
know that all doors, the hood and the liftgate/trunk are closed. If any
of these are not closed, the horn will chirp twice to warn you that
they are still open.
• Press the driver or passenger interior door lock control
front door is open, then close the door.
112

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

while a

Locks and Security
• Lock the doors using the intelligent access method (press the lock
area in either front door handle).
• Press and hold the 7 • 8 and 9 • 0 controls together on the keyless
entry pad to lock the doors (driver’s door must be closed).
After locking the doors using any of the methods above, the turn signal
lamps will flash once indicating that the perimeter alarm is in the
pre-armed mode and will become fully armed in 20 seconds.
When fully armed (after the 20 second pre-arm mode), any IA keys
found inside the vehicle are disabled/inoperable and will not start the
button to re-enable them.
engine. Press
Disarming the system
To disarm the system, do any of the following:
• Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20-second,
pre-armed mode will disarm the system.
on the remote entry
• Unlock the doors by pressing unlock
transmitter.
• Unlock the doors by using your keyless entry pad.
• Enter the vehicle using intelligent access.
on the remote entry transmitter. The alarm
• Press the panic control
system will still be armed, but this shuts off the horn and turn lamps
when the alarm is sounding.
• Unlock the doors using a key. If you use this method the system will
not disarm, but you will have an opportunity to disarm the vehicle
once entered. See the Note following.
Note: If the driver’s door is unlocked with a key, a chime will sound
when you open the door and the message center will display TO STOP
ALARM START VEHICLE. When this occurs, you will have 12 seconds
to disarm the alarm using any of the actions above, otherwise the alarm
will trigger.
Perimeter alarm issues
If there seems to be a potential perimeter alarm system problem with
your vehicle, ensure ALL keys/remote entry transmitters are brought to
your authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting.

113

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
FRONT SEATS
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
Adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front row head restraints that are vertically
adjustable.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.
The adjustable head restraints
consist of:
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (1),
• two steel stems (2),
• and a guide sleeve unlock/remove
button (3).
• a guide sleeve adjust release
button (4),

114

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

1
2

Seating and Safety Restraints
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position.
2. Raise the head restraint by pulling up on the head restraint (1).
3. Lower the head restraint by pressing and holding the guide sleeve
adjust release button (3) and pushing down on the head restraint (1).
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.
To remove the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the adjust/release button (3) and
the unlock/remove button (4), then pull up on the head restraint.
To reinstall the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Insert the two stems into the guide sleeve collars.
2. Push the head restraint down until it locks.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, head restraints must be installed properly.

115

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Adjusting the front power seat
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your
seatback, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not
hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map
pocket (if equipped) when a child is in the front passenger seat. Do
not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the
seat and the center console (if equipped). Check the “passenger airbag
off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Refer
to Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag supplemental
restraint system (SRS) section for additional details. Failure to follow
these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing
system.
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.

116

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Press the front or rear portion to tilt
the seat.

Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.

Move the switch to recline the
seatback forward or rearward.

Using the power lumbar support
The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Press one side of the control to
adjust firmness.
Press the other side of the control
to adjust softness.

117

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Heated and cooled seats
Heated seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the heated seats:
Press the heated seat symbol to
cycle through the various heat
settings and off. Warmer settings are
indicated by more indicator lights.
If the engine falls below 350 RPMs while the heated seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
Cooled seats
The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the cooled seats:
Press the cooled seat symbol to
cycle through the various cooling
settings and off. Cooler settings are
indicated by more indicator lights.

A/C

If the engine falls below 350 RPMs while the cooled seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
118

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Climate controlled seats air filter replacement
The climate controlled seat system includes air filters that must be
replaced periodically. Refer to the scheduled maintenance information
for more information.
• There is a filter located under
each front seat.

• The filter can be accessed from the 2nd row foot-well area. Move the
front seats all the way to the full front and full up positions to ease
access.
To remove an air filter:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Push up on the outside rigid edge
of the filter until the tabs are
released, then rotate the air filter
toward the front of the vehicle.

3. Remove filter.

119

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its
housing making sure that the far
forward end is all the way up in the
housing.
2. Push in on the center of the
outside edge of the filter and rotate
up into the housing until it clips into
position.
Memory feature
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat, power
mirrors and power tilt/telescopic
steering column (if equipped) to
two programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the instrument panel.
• To program position 1, move the
appropriate features to the
desired position using the
associated controls. Press and hold button 1 for at least two seconds.
A chime will sound confirming that a memory position has been set.
• To program position 2, repeat the previous procedure using button 2.
A memory position may be programmed at any time.
To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter, refer to
Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter.
A programmed memory position can be recalled:
• in any gearshift position if the ignition is not on.
• only in P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the ignition is on.
The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter
(unlock) control (if the transmitter is programmed
to a memory position) or, when you enter a valid personal entry code
that is programmed to a memory position. The mirrors will move to the
programmed position and the seat will move to the easy entry position.
The seat will move to the final position when the key is in the ignition (if
easy entry feature is enabled).
120

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Memory profiles
The memory feature also coordinates with user-created profile settings
utilizing the infotainment touchscreen system. See the Creating a user
profile section in the MyLincoln Touch™ supplement for more
information.
Easy entry/exit feature
This feature automatically moves the steering wheel all the way up and
in and moves the driver’s seat rearward 2 in. (5 cm) when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the ignition is turned off
The seat and steering wheel will move to the original position when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the ignition is put in accessory mode
The easy entry feature can be turned off or on through the vehicle
message center. Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
REAR SEATS
Rear seat head restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with rear seat outboard head restraints that
look differently than the front head restraints, but function similarly.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.
For details about how to raise, lower and remove the rear head
restraints, refer to Adjustable head restraints at the beginning of this
chapter.
The center rear head restraint is fixed and non-adjustable.

121

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Folding down the 60/40 rear seats
Note: The head restraints should be placed in the full down position
before folding the seatback down.
Note: Ensure that no objects such as books, purses, or briefcases are on
the floor in front of, on or under the second row seat cushion before
actuating the release lever to cycle the seats to the load-floor position.
WARNING: To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety
belts, ensure that the safety belts are not buckled when moving
the seat to the load floor position.
2nd row manual folding seat
To fold down the rear seat, pull up
on the lever on the outboard side of
the seat cushion and let the
seatback rotate downward into the
load floor position.

2nd row EasyFold™ seatback release (if equipped)
WARNING: Ensure that the seat is unoccupied when folding it
down. Folding the seat while occupied could result in damage to
the seat or injury.
Note: The power feature is operational when the vehicle is in park and
the liftgate has been open for less than 10 minutes.
The control buttons are located on the left-hand rear quarter trim panel
(accessible from the liftgate area).
122

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Press and hold the control
mechanism to lower the seatback.
The top portion lowers the right
(40%) seatback, and the bottom
portion lowers the left (60%)
seatback.

Returning the 2nd row seatback to the upright position
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that the latches are engaged.
An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden
stop or collision.
Rotate the seatback upward until the seatback latches in the upright
position. The seatback will click when it is locked into position.
Adjusting the second row seatback
WARNING: Reclining the
seatback can cause an
occupant to slide under the seat’s
safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injuries in the event of a
collision.

The second row seat reclines for
additional comfort. To adjust the
second row seatback to the desired
position, while seated, pull the
release lever up and push the
seatback rearward.
123

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Seat-mounted armrest and cupholders
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear
seat armrest. To fold the armrest
down, release the latch located on
the seatback by pressing down and
pulling forward.

To access the cup holders, lift up
one of the slotted areas on the
cover.

WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
Returning the 2nd row armrest to the upright position
Close the cover on the cup holders. Rotate the armrest rearward until
the armrest is in the latched position. The armrest will click when it is
latched into position.
124

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Rear heated seats (if equipped)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear door panels.
To operate the heated seats:
• Press the indicated side of the
control for maximum heat.
• Press again to deactivate.

• Press the indicated side of the
control for minimum heat.
• Press again to deactivate.

The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle. While the
ignition is in the on position, activating the high or low heated seat
switch enables heating mode. When activated, they will turn off
automatically when the engine is turned off.
The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been
activated.
125

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System™
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal
crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further
reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze
different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in
a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system
• Passenger airbag off/on indicator lamp
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System determined the
accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions (not rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts) unless the collision causes sufficient
126

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
longitudinal deceleration. The pretensioners are designed to activate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, and in rollovers and side collisions
when the Safety Canopy威 is activated.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints
(SRS) section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, this occurs
because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag. For other
occupants, this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by
safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre-crash
braking. The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary
injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained. Accident
statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the front.
WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
127

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in
the back seat and always properly use appropriate child
restraints.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the front
passenger airbag and passenger seat-mounted side airbag. The system is
designed to help protect small (child size) occupants from frontal airbag
deployments when they are seated or restrained in the front passenger
seat contrary to proper child-seating or restraint usage
recommendations. Even with this technology, parents are STRONGLY
encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. The
sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and passenger
seat-mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty and the
safety belt is unbuckled.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions, and in rollover and side collisions when the
Safety Canopy威 is activated. This helps increase the effectiveness of the
safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt pretensioners can be
activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together with
the front airbags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management feature
— front outboard section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational
The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not
required.
128

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, driver seat
position sensor, and front passenger sensing system. In addition, the
RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Safety restraints precautions
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
129

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.

130

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.

Restraint of pregnant women
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and
the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the safety
belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The shoulder
portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the chest.
Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See figure below.
Pregnant women should always wear
their safety belt. The lap belt portion
of a combination lap and shoulder
belt should be positioned low across
the hips below the belly and worn as
tight as comfort will allow. The
shoulder belt should be positioned to
cross the middle of the shoulder and
the center of the chest.
Safety belt locking modes
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. The driver safety belt has the first locking mode and the front
outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking
modes described as follows:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
131

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out
too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing
out again in a slow and controlled manner.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a
booster, is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or
Safety seats for children later in this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire belt
is pulled out.

• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the safety belt system at
all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child
seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be
checked for proper function.
132

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly “automatic locking
retractor” feature or any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
Energy management feature — front outboard
• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front seats to help further reduce the risk of injury in
the event of a head-on collision.
• The energy management feature has a retractor assembly that is
designed to extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner.
This helps reduce the belt force acting on the user’s chest.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and replace if necessary the belt
and retractor assembly after an accident could increase the risk
of injury in a collision.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front outboard passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the
occupant’s body at the start of the crash.
WARNING: The driver and front passenger safety belt system
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in
deployment of front airbags, seat-mounted side airbags and Safety
Canopy威 System and safety belt pretensioners.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is an 8 inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
133

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
Safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments at the front outboard
seating positions. Adjust the height
of the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
pull on the center button and slide
the height adjuster up or down.
Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure
it is locked in place.
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety
belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision.

Second row comfort guide
The second row outboard
lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
belt comfort guide. This guide is
attached to the head restraint and is
stored in a pocket in the seatback.
It is used to adjust the comfort of
the shoulder belt for smaller
occupants in the outboard second
row seats.

134

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
To adjust the comfort guide:
1. Slip the shoulder belt into the
belt guide.
2. Slide the guide up or down along
the webbing so that the belt is
centered on the occupant’s shoulder.

WARNING: Position the safety belt comfort guide so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety
belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.

135

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Conditions of operation
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...

Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.

The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.

Belt-Minder姞
The Belt-Minder威 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder威 feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the Belt-Minder威 feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder威 warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately five minutes) for one occupant
(driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
Belt-Minder威 feature.

136

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
If...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position or less than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt becomes
unbuckled for approximately
one minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 3 mph
(5 km/h) and more than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...

Then...
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.

The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.

137

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given...
“Crashes are rare events”

“I’m not going far”
“Belts are uncomfortable”

“I was in a hurry”

“Safety belts don’t work”

“Traffic is light”

“Belts wrinkle my clothes”

“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”

138

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Consider...
36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles (40 km) of home.
We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
Prime time for an accident.
Belt-Minder威 reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.

Seating and Safety Restraints
Reasons given...
“I have an airbag”

“I’d rather be thrown clear”

Consider...
Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.

WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a
latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder威 chime. To
do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s airbag
system.
One-time disable
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the safety belt for that seating position, the Belt-Minder威 is disabled for
the current ignition cycle. The Belt-Minder威 feature will enable during
the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for
approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one-time
disable.
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder姞 feature
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features must be
disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the
same key cycle.

139

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The gearshift is in P (Park).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled.
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder威, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you
leave the Belt-Minder威 system activated for yourself and others who
may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder威 feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition on. DO NOT START THE ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (approximately
1–2 minutes).
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled
state.
• After Step 3, the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash 12 times in three seconds.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash 12 times in three seconds.

140

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

Important supplemental restraint system precautions
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or
gently and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is greatest close to
the trim covering the airbag module.

WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
141

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module.
Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause
those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso
causing serious injury.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. See your
authorized dealer.
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.

142

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and airbags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
WARNING: Airbags can kill
or injure a child in a child
seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat all the
way back.

How does the safety belt pretensioner and airbag supplemental
restraint system work?
The safety belt pretensioner and
airbag SRS are designed to activate
when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates
pretensioner activation and airbag
inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not
activate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Front airbags are designed to activate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless
the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.

143

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air
bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags)
• seat-mounted side airbags. Refer to Seat-mounted side airbag system
later in this chapter
• safety belt pretensioners
• one or more impact and safing sensors
144

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
• a readiness light and tone
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components
• Side curtain airbag system. Refer to Safety Canopy威 System later in
this chapter.
• Front passenger sensing system. Refer to Front passenger sensing
system later in this chapter.
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp. Refer to
Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
backup power, the airbag ignitors and safety belt pretensioners.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal
airbag under certain conditions.
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or
disabled (will not inflate).
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat.
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat.
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time.

145

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Passenger airbag status indicator
The front passenger sensing system
uses a passenger airbag status
indicator which will illuminate
indicating that the front passenger
frontal airbag is either ON (enabled)
or OFF (disabled). The indicator
lamp is located in the center stack
of the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator OFF and ON lamps will
illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is first turned on
to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when the front passenger
seat is unoccupied, or a rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag, the passenger airbag status
indicator will illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the passenger airbag
status indicator illuminates the ON lamp, then turn the vehicle off,
remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the ON lamp and remain illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp is lit, it is possible that the
person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
146

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
• If the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp remains lit even
after this, the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat.
Passenger Airbag
Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator
OFF: Lit
Empty
Disabled
ON: Unlit
OFF: Lit
Child
Disabled
ON: Unlit
OFF: Unlit
Adult
Enabled
ON: Lit
Note: When the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp is
illuminated, the passenger side airbag (seat mounted) may be disabled to
avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.
Occupant

WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children
12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
If you think that the state of the passenger airbag status indicator lamp
is incorrect, check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat
• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if
equipped)
• Objects hanging off the seat back
147

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing
system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:
Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or
hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between
the seat and the center console (if equipped).
Check the passenger airbag status indicator lamp for proper airbag
status.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front
passenger seat sensing system.
In case there is a problem with the
front passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster will stay lit.
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the following:
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that
may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take
the following steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
• Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light in
the instrument cluster is no longer illuminated
148

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
• If the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster remains
illuminated, this may or may/not be a problem due to the front
passenger sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide or see your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing
system.
Determining if the system is operational
The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator light in the
instrument cluster or a backup tone to indicate the condition of the
system. Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light
for front and side airbag system)
will either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Seat-mounted side airbag system
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or
near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front
seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.
149

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag SRS, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle should always wear
their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided.
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable bag (airbag) with a
gas generator concealed behind
the outboard bolster of the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
• The same warning light,
electronic control and diagnostic
unit as used for the front airbags.
• The same readiness airbag light,
electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags.
• Crash sensors mounted in each front door.
• Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side of the vehicle).
Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
150

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the side
airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again.
The side airbag system
(including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired
area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.

Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Warning lights and
chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance
of the airbag is not required.
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
• The readiness light (same light as used for front airbag system) will
either flash or stay lit.
151

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned to the on position.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
Safety Canopy姞 System
WARNING: Do not place
objects or mount equipment
on or near the headliner at the
siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying Safety
Canopy威. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk
of personal injury in the event of a
collision.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety
Canopy威 could injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
Safety Canopy威 System, its fuses, the A, B, C or D pillar trim, or
the headliner on a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy威. See your
authorized dealer.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle including the driver
should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS
and Safety Canopy威 System is provided.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place
objects in the deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy威.

152

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the Safety Canopy姞 System work?
The design and development of the
Safety Canopy system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy威).
The Safety Canopy system consists
of the following:
• An inflatable curtain with a gas
generator concealed behind the
headliner and above the doors
(one on each side of vehicle).
• A headliner designed to flex open
above the side doors to allow
Safety Canopy deployment.
• The same readiness airbag light, electronic control and diagnostic unit
as used for the front airbags.
• Crash sensors mounted in each front door.
• Two crash sensors located at the C-pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side of the vehicle).
• Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
The Safety Canopy system, in combination with safety belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.

153

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second or third row seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with
children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The Safety Canopy system is designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to
close an electrical circuit that initiates Safety Canopy inflation or when a
certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy is mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, above each row of seats. In certain lateral collisions or rollover
events, the Safety Canopy system will be activated, regardless of which
seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the
side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided
in side impact collisions and rollover events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy did not activate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The Safety
Canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or rollover
events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions, unless the
collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover.
WARNING: If the Safety
Canopy system has
deployed, the Safety Canopy will
not function again unless replaced.
The Safety Canopy system
(including the A, B, C, and D
pillar trim and headliner) must be
inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the Safety
Canopy is not replaced, it will not
function again, which will increase
the risk of injury in a future
collision.

154

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
• The readiness airbag light (same light as for front airbag system) will
either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system
may not function properly in the event of a collision or rollover event.
SOS Post-Crash Alert System™
The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the
horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact
that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain [if equipped] or Safety
Canopy威 [if equipped]) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are
taken by the driver or any other person:
• pressing the hazard control button,
• or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter.
The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including
pretensioners)
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.

155

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in
a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.
Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your
local St. John Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport
Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age,
and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.

156

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended
Child size, height, weight, or age
restraint type
Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less Use a child safety
toddlers
(generally age four or younger)
seat (sometimes
called an infant
carrier,
convertible seat,
or toddler seat).
Small
Children who have outgrown or no
Use a
children
longer properly fit in a child safety
belt-positioning
seat (generally children who are less
booster seat.
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
are greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12), and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and
upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer)
Larger
Children who have outgrown or no
Use a vehicle
children
longer properly fit in a belt-positioning safety belt having
booster seat (generally children who
the lap belt snug
are at least 4 feet 9 inches
and low across
(1.45 meters) tall or greater than 80 lb the hips, shoulder
(36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if
belt centered
recommended by child restraint
across the
manufacturer)
shoulder and
chest, and
seatback upright.
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in.
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
157

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children

Restraint
Type

Rear
facing
child seat
Forward
facing
child seat
Forward
facing
child seat

Use any attachment method as indicated
below by “X”
LATCH LATCH Safety Safety
Safety
(lower (lower
belt
belt and belt
Child anchors anchors and
LATCH
only
Weight and
only)
top
(lower
top
tether anchors
tether
anchor and top
anchor)
tether
anchor)
Up to
48 lb
X
X
(21 kg)
Up to
48 lb
X
X
X
(21 kg)
Over
48 lb
X
X
(21 kg)

WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and
under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.

158

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Transporting children
Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their age, height and weight. All children are shaped
differently. The child height, age and weight thresholds provided are
recommendations or the minimum requirements of law. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) provides education and
training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in
the correct restraint system. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and your
pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and
CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet
at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local St. John
Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information,
contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your local St. John
Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport Canada at
1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca).
159

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult
passengers in your vehicle.
If the child is the proper height, age, and weight (as specified by your
child safety seat or booster manufacturer), fits the restraint and can be
restrained properly, then restrain the child in the child safety seat or
with the belt-positioning booster. Remember that child seats and
belt-positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of
different heights, ages and weights. Children who are too large for child
safety seats or belt-positioning boosters (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always properly wear safety belts.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Infant and/or toddler seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Carefully follow all of the
manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you
put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat
properly, the child may be injured
in a sudden stop or collision.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all the
way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
160

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to help prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place vehicle seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Step 5
below. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.

161

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.

3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.

4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.

162

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.

6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the
remaining slack that will exist once
the additional weight of the child is
added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to the
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
towards the buckle will additionally
help to remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.

163

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward and back. There should
be no more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) of
movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Attaching child safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) attachments
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the “seat bight”) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind
that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to
the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided
with your child seat. Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a
child safety seat having a top tether strap. See Attaching child safety
seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety
restraints for children in this chapter for more information.

164

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Your vehicle has LATCH lower
anchors for child seat installation at
the seating positions marked with
the child seat symbol.

The LATCH anchors are located at
the rear section of the rear seat
between the cushion and seat back,
below the locator symbols on the
seat back. Follow the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to
properly install a child seat with
LATCH attachments.

Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps.
Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this
chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors
shown.
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious
injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.

165

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions
(center seating use)
The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced
460 mm (18 inches) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH lower
anchors is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with attachments on belt webbing) can
only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is
attached to that anchor.
WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors
is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. Do not use LATCH
lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at
least as far apart as those in this vehicle.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching
child safety seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Refer
to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
in this chapter.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring
point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your
child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a
longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach
the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
166

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under the second row
seat gap cover marked with tether anchor symbols (shown with title).
The tether strap anchors in your
vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):

WARNING: Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate
tether anchor as shown. The tether strap may not work properly
if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
WARNING: Do not use seat anchors as cargo tie downs.

Once the child safety seat has been installed, using either the safety belt,
the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top
tether strap.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, and have
attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor, do not
tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat
cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just
touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Perform the following steps to attach a child safety seat to the tether
anchor:
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, , otherwise
route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint. If the top of the
safety seat hits the adjustable head restraint, raise the head restraint to
let the child seat fit further rearward.

167

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Locate the correct anchor behind
the gap cover for the selected
seating position.

3. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
WARNING: If the tether
strap is clipped incorrectly,
the child safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event of a
collision.

4. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING: If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk
of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
Child booster seats
The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of
the vehicle safety belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g.,
convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are
around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner guide
for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety seat.
Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,
remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly
secured to the vehicle.

168

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children
who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder
belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt
could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of
both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child
safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster.
Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder safety belts fit
better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips
and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while
minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a
few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in
the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a
height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to
age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
169

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Types of booster seats
There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless
and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle
lap/shoulder belt.
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield. If a vehicle seating position
has a low seat back or no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (as
measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this
case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a
higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider
using a high back booster seat.
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.

170

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below
also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s
hips.

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

171

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Seating and Safety Restraints
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a
booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not
stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the
safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a
collision.
172

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTICE TO CROSSOVER VEHICLE OWNERS
Crossover vehicles handle differently
than passenger cars in the various
driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways
and off-road. Crossover vehicles are
not designed for cornering at speeds
as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
WARNING: Crossover vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of
serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your owner’s guide for specific information about equipment
features, instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
All-wheel drive (AWD) system (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-time all-wheel drive (AWD)
system. With the AWD option, power will be delivered to the front
wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. The AWD
system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. The AWD
feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which
173

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise
similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle
under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive
stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
For AWD vehicles, a spare tire of a different size other than the tire
provided should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire size (other than
the spare tire provided) or major dissimilar tire sized between the front
and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and
default to front-wheel drive.
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of AWD
vehicles. Although a AWD vehicle may accelerate better than
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop any
faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Crossover vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a
longer wheelbase.
• Narrower – to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces.
As a result of the above dimensional differences, crossover vehicles often
will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
174

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
175

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
176

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
177

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased
risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of
vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure and not appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
178

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare
tire/wheel information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires (see the
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information section for description): Store
and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.

179

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.

180

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire replacement requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

181

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.

182

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
183

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
Scheduled Maintenance Guide chapter) will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life.
• Front-wheel drive
(FWD)/All-wheel drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)

Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.

184

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
owner’s guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
185

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M
81 mph (130 km/h)
N
87 mph (140 km/h)
Q
99 mph (159 km/h)
R
106 mph (171 km/h)
S
112 mph (180 km/h)
T
118 mph (190 km/h)
U
124 mph (200 km/h)
H
130 mph (210 km/h)
V
149 mph (240 km/h)
W
168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
186

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.

187

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.

188

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,
the larger the number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading – with and without a trailer section.

189

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.

190

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing tires with a TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire/wheel cavity. The
pressure sensor is attached to
the valve stem. The pressure
sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is
removed. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter.

191

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Understanding your tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road
tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org for additional
information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the
damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on your
vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the tire pressure monitoring system,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with a
TPMS in this section.

192

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the
following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring
system:
Low tire pressure
warning light
Solid warning light

Possible cause Customer action required
Tire(s)
under-inflated

1. Check your tire pressure to
ensure tires are properly
inflated; refer to Inflating
your tires in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to
the manufacturer’s
recommended inflation
pressure as shown on the Tire
Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for
at least two minutes over
20 mph (32 km/h) before the
light will turn off.
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel/tire and reinstall it on
the vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description
on how the system functions,
refer to When your temporary
spare tire is installed in this
section.
TPMS
If your tires are properly
malfunction
inflated and your spare tire is
not in use and the light
remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.

193

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Low tire pressure
warning light
Flashing warning
light

Possible cause Customer action required
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel and re-mount it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description
of how the system functions
under these conditions, refer to
When your temporary spare
tire is installed in this section.
TPMS
If your tires are properly
malfunction
inflated and your spare tire is
not in use and the TPMS
warning light still flashes,
contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.

When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower
pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower
than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is on,
visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more tires
are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If any
tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location
where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
194

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit
failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that only
cable chains are used with steel wheels (of the same size and
specifications) as chains may chip aluminum wheels.
Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using
snow tires and chains.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Install cable chains only on the front wheels.
• Use only cable chains on 18 inch wheels with P245/60R18 tires.
• Do not use tire chains, cables or optional traction devices on 20 inch
or 22 inch wheels and tires.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cable chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and retighten the cable chains. If this does not work,
remove the cable chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire cable chains when they are no longer needed. Do not
use tire cable chains on dry roads.

195

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.

196

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:

Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
197

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.

198

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Example only:

WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.

199

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading

GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicles’ braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult
your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
provided by your authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
200

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1,400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1,400 - 1,100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement
from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have
been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle
with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100 lb. (45 kg)
bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the
cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 lb.
(99 kg), the calculation would be: 1,400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1,400
- 440 - 1,200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to
carry that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg
- (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kg. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove
3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then the load calculation would be:
1,400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
201

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with your vehicle may require the use of a trailer tow
option package.
Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. For your safety and to
maximize vehicle performance, be sure to use the proper equipment
while towing.
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least
1,000 miles (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer.
• Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
• Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to
tow in this chapter.
• Stay within your vehicle’s load limits.
• Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving
while you tow in this chapter.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to
Special operating conditions in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide
chapter.
When towing maximum loads under high outside temperatures and on
steep grades, the A/C system may cycle on and off to protect the engine
from overheating. This may result in a temporary increase of interior
temperatures.
For load specification terms found on the label, refer to Vehicle loading
- with and without a trailer in this chapter. Remember to figure in the
tongue load of your loaded vehicle when figuring the total weight.

202

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Powertrain
3.7L
3.7L
3.7L
3.7L

FWD
AWD
FWD
AWD

Class
Class
Class
Class

I
I
II
II

Maximum GCWR - lb
(kg)
6770 (3072)
6940 (3149)
8270 (3752)
8440 (3829)

Maximum Trailer
Weight - lb (kg)
2000 (907)
2000 (907)
3500 (1588)
3500 (1588)

Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. Contact your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance.
Trailer tow connector (vehicles equipped with a Class II trailer
tow/prep package)
The trailer tow connector is located under the rear bumper, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
Refer to the following chart for information regarding the
factory-equipped trailer tow connector:
Color
1. Dark Green
2. Yellow
3. Brown
4. White

Function
Right turn signal/brake lamp/hazard flasher
Left turn signal/brake lamp/hazard flasher
Tail lamps/parking lamps
Ground

Hitches
Do not use a hitch that clamps onto the vehicle’s bumper or attaches to
the axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10–15% of
the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
203

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the hook retainers on the
vehicle. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Be sure your trailer conforms to all applicable local and Federal
regulations regarding trailer braking. If your trailer is equipped with
electronically-controlled brakes you will need to have an electronic brake
controller with associated wiring installed to your vehicle by an
authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision
greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working.
Do not splice into the vehicle lamp wiring for trailer lamps. Your
vehicle uses an advanced electronic module to control and
monitor your vehicle lamps. Splicing into the wiring or attaching
wiring to the vehicle bulb may DISABLE the rear vehicle lamps or
cause them not to function properly. Your lamp outage feature
may also be disabled or provide incorrect information.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles
(800 km) of trailer towing and don’t make full-throttle starts.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
204

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Use a lower gear to eliminate excessive shifting and assist in
transmission cooling. For additional information, refer to Automatic
transmission operation in the Driving chapter.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached; anticipate
stops and brake gradually.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing-up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle-trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow
your vehicle for personal travel (such as behind a motor home or a
truck).
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. Refer to the Climate
Controls chapter for more information.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, please refer to
Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to your vehicle after it
is hooked-up to the RV or tow dolly.
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles can be towed with all four wheels
on the ground or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow
dolly. If you are using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the
equipment provider. If you are towing with all four wheels on the ground,
refer to the towing instructions below.

205

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Tires, Wheels and Loading
All-wheel drive (AWD) vehicles can be towed with all four wheels on
the ground or with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle
transport trailer. Do not tow your AWD vehicle with the front
wheels off the ground (by using a tow dolly) and the rear wheels
on the ground; this will cause damage to your AWD system. If you
are using a vehicle transport trailer, follow the instruction specified by
the equipment provider. If you are towing with all four wheels on the
ground, refer to the towing instructions below.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, follow these
instructions:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
• Place the transmission shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Place the ignition in the accessory position (refer to Starting in the
Driving chapter).
• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)
• Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning
of each day and at each fuel stop.

206

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
STARTING
Ignition modes
1. Off — This position shuts the engine and all electrical accessories off.
Press and release the START/STOP button without applying the brake
pedal when your vehicle is in accessory or on modes or when the engine
is running.
2. Accessory — This allows electrical accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not running. Press and release the
START/STOP button without applying the brake pedal. ACCESSORY
POWER ACTIVE and PRESS BRAKE TO START will be displayed in the
message center. Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for more information.
3. On — This will power your vehicle’s electrical system and the warning
lights in the instrument cluster will illuminate, but the engine will remain
off. Press and release the START/STOP button once from accessory
mode or twice from off without applying the brake pedal.
4. Start — Cranks the engine. Press the START/STOP button (for any
length of time) while applying the brake pedal.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.
This system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.

207

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against
exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in order
to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure vehicle accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.

208

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
• Make sure the gearshift lever is in
P (Park).

Push button start system
Your vehicle is equipped with the
push button start system. You can
start your vehicle by pressing the
start button in combination with the
brake pedal rather than using a key.
The start button is located on the
instrument panel to the right of the
steering wheel.
In order to operate the push button
start system and start the vehicle,
your Intelligent Access key (IA key)
must be present inside the vehicle.
1. Press the START/STOP button (for any length of time) while applying
the brake pedal. Your vehicle has a computer assisted cranking system
that assists in starting the engine. After releasing the button, the engine
may continue cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle starts.
Note: You can start the engine from any ignition mode. Note: The
indicator light on the start button will illuminate when the vehicle is in
on mode and when the engine is started.
2. After idling for a few seconds, release the parking brake, apply the
brake, shift into gear and drive.
209

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
There may be areas inside your vehicle where the IA key is not detected.
If the message NO KEY DETECTED appears on your message center
when you press the START/STOP button, it may be necessary to move
your IA key to another area within the vehicle. The IA key may not be
detected near the roof (between the driver or passenger sunvisor and
the roof, or in the overhead console area) or in the extreme corners of
the rear package tray, near your audio speakers. It is not recommended
that you stow the IA key in these locations. If you move the IA key to a
location where it has been detected before and you still see the NO KEY
DETECTED message, your IA key’s battery may be low or you may be in
an area with excessive radio frequency interference. If this occurs, you
can use the back-up method to start your vehicle (see below).
Backup method of starting: Your IA key uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to start
when you press the START/STOP button and apply the brake pedal. If
excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area, or if the
battery in your IA key is low, it may be necessary to start your car by
inserting the IA key in the backup slot, located in the center console.
Insert the IA key into the slot with buttons facing out and with key ring
up. After inserting the IA key into the backup slot, use the START/STOP
button and brake pedal to start your vehicle as usual. The vehicle should
respond normally as long as the IA key is in the backup slot in the
center console. Once the vehicle is started, the IA key can be removed
from the backup slot, if desired.
Fast restart feature: The fast restart feature allows you to re-start your
vehicle within 20 seconds of switching the vehicle off, if a valid IA key is
not present when the vehicle is switched off. When you switch your
vehicle off without an IA key in the passenger compartment or trunk, the
message RESTART NOW OR KEY IS NEEDED will be displayed in the
message center. You can re-start the vehicle (by applying the brake pedal
and pressing the START/STOP button) for up to 20 seconds, even though
the IA key is not present. After 20 seconds have expired, you can no
longer start your vehicle without the IA key present inside the vehicle.
Switching the vehicle off when not in P (Park): It is recommended
that you shift into the P (Park) position before switching your vehicle
off. If you switch your vehicle off with the shifter in any position other
than P (Park), the message SHIFT TO PARK will be displayed in the
message center. If the vehicle is left in this state, your key in ignition
chime will activate when the driver door is opened, and you may drain
your vehicle’s battery. In order to avoid draining your battery, it is
recommended that you always shift to P (Park) before or immediately
after switching your vehicle off.
210

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Absence of the Intelligent Access key: Once the vehicle has started,
the vehicle will remain running until being turned off by the
START/STOP button, even if the IA key is no longer found in the vehicle.
Whenever a door is opened and then closed while the vehicle is running,
the system will search for an IA key inside the vehicle and the message
center will display NO KEY DETECTED if the IA key is no longer
present. This message is a reminder that someone else in the vehicle
may have taken the IA key when exiting the vehicle. If the IA key is no
longer present in the vehicle, you will not be able to re-start your vehicle
outside of the Fast Restart time (see Fast Restart Feature above). It is
important to be aware of where your IA key is located in the vehicle, to
avoid becoming stranded without an IA key.
Your vehicle may have remote start capability. Refer to Remote entry
system in the Locks and Security chapter.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating or
air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C electrical
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
211

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged
(cheater) adapters.
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked “Suitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.” Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug/engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
212

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater will use .4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. Your
factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat;
however, maximum temperature is attained after approximately three
hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than three hours will
not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional
electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Warning lights and
!
P
chimes in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
BRAKE
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.

213

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal. Do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
Brake assist
The brake assist system provides full braking force during panic braking
situations. It detects a rapid application of the brake pedal and uses the
ABS system to achieve maximum braking pressure. Once a panic brake
application is detected, the system will remain activated as long as the
brake pedal is pressed or ABS is engaged. The system is deactivated by
either releasing the brake pedal or coming to a complete stop. When the
system activates, noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal
pulsation may be observed; this is normal.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
ABS
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
!
P
normal braking is still effective. If
your BRAKE warning lamp
BRAKE
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.

214

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Parking brake
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked. To set the
parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down until the pedal
stops.

The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned on) until the
parking brake is released.

!
P
BRAKE

WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). Turn the
ignition to the lock position and remove the key whenever you leave
the vehicle. For vehicles with the push button start system, remove the
IA key whenever you leave the vehicle.

The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
Press the parking brake pedal downward again to release the parking
brake. Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear
out quickly and reduce fuel economy.
Note: If the vehicle is driven with the parking brake applied, a chime
will sound.
ADVANCETRAC姞 WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL™ (RSC姞)
STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system provides the following stability
enhancement features for certain driving situations:
• Traction control system (TCS), which functions to help avoid
drive-wheel spin and loss of traction.
• Electronic stability control (ESC), which functions to help avoid skids
or lateral slides
215

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
• Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威), which functions to help avoid a
vehicle roll-over.
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system. Install any aftermarket stereo
loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the
tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering
with the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 sensors. Reducing the effectiveness
of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system could lead to an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system is an indication that
at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle,
potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system
activates, SLOW DOWN.
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system, the stability control light and
stability control off light will illuminate steadily. Verify that the
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system was not manually disabled through
the message center. If the stability control light and stability control off
light still illuminate steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac威 with
RSC威 disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

216

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system automatically enables each time
the engine is started. All features of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system
(TCS, ESC, and RSC威) are active and monitor the vehicle from start-up.
However, the system will only intervene if the driving situation requires
it.
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威
system includes a traction control
off selection located in the message
center, a stability control light and a
stability control off light in the instrument cluster. Refer to Message
center in the Instrument cluster section for more information. Both the
stability control light and the stability control off light will illuminate
temporarily during start-up as part of a normal system self-check. The
stability control light may illuminate (flash) during certain driving
conditions which cause the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system to operate.
If the stability control light and stability control off light illuminate
steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
The message center will also indicate a failure with the AdvanceTrac威
with RSC威 system.
When AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 performs a normal system self-check,
some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake, and/or a
rumble, grunting, or grinding noise after startup and when driving off.
When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 you may
experience the following:
• A slight deceleration of the vehicle
• The stability control light will flash.
• A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal
• If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. You
may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during
this severe condition.
• The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual.
Traction control system (TCS)
Traction control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain
traction of the wheels, typically when driving on slippery and/or hilly
road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel spin.

217

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways, which may work
separately or in tandem; engine traction control and brake traction
control. Engine traction control works to limit drive-wheel spin by
momentarily reducing engine power. Brake traction control works to limit
wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is
slipping. Traction control is most active at low speeds.
During traction control events, the stability control light in the
instrument cluster will flash.
If the traction control system is activated excessively in a short period of
time, the braking portion of the system may become temporarily disabled
to allow the brakes to cool down. In this situation, traction control will
use only engine power reduction or transfer to help control the wheels
from over-spinning. When the brakes have cooled down, the system will
regain all features. Anti-lock braking, RSC威, and ESC are not affected by
this condition and will continue to function during the cool-down period.
The engine traction control and brake traction control system may be
deactivated in certain situations. See the Switching off AdvanceTrac威
with RSC威 section below.
Electronic stability control (ESC)
Electronic stability control (ESC) may enhance your vehicle’s directional
stability during adverse maneuvers, for example when cornering severely
or avoiding objects in the roadway. ESC operates by applying brakes to
one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine
power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide
laterally.
During ESC events the stability control light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the ESC system, which
include but are not limited to:
• Taking a turn too fast
• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
• Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces
• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road
• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa
• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa
• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter).
218

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
The electronic stability control system may be deactivated in certain
situations. See the Switching off AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 section
following.
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威)
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威) may help to maintain roll stability of the
vehicle during adverse maneuvers. RSC威 operates by detecting the
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the
brakes to one or more wheels individually.
During an event that activates RSC威 the stability control light in the
instrument cluster will flash.
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the RSC威 system, which
include:
• Emergency lane-change
• Taking a turn too fast
• Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
The RSC威 system may be deactivated in certain situations. See the
Switching off AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 section following.
Switching off AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威
If the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, and seems to lose engine
power, switching off certain features of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威
system may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin. This
will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the
obstacle.
To switch off the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system, select traction
control off in the message center. Full features of the AdvanceTrac威 with
RSC威 system can be restored by selecting traction control on, or by
turning off and restarting the engine.
If you switch off the AdvanceTrac威
with RSC威 system, the stability
control off light will illuminate
steadily. Selecting traction control
OFF
on will turn off the stability control
light.
In R (Reverse), ABS and the engine traction control and brake traction
control features will continue to function. However, ESC and RSC威 are
disabled.
219

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
AdvanceTrac威 Features
Stability
control
Message
Control switch
Mode
light
center display
operation
)
(
Turns on
Default at
System
at
None
start-up
initialization
start-up
Pressed once,
Traction
TRACTION
On
momentarily
control off
CONTROL OFF
Pressed again
AdvanceTrac威
ADVANCETRAC
Off
after deactivation fully enabled
ON
Note: The ESC/RSC威 systems can’t be turned on or off using
control switch.

TCS

Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
the

TRAILER SWAY CONTROL
When properly equipped, trailer sway control will use the vehicle’s
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system to detect and help reduce trailer sway
by applying brake force at individual wheels and, if necessary, by
reducing engine power. Trailer sway control is only enabled above
40 mph (64 km/h).
WARNING: Trailer sway control does not prevent a trailer from
swaying. It mitigates the sway from increasing once it has
occurred. If you are experiencing trailer sway, it is likely that the
trailer is improperly loaded for the correct tongue weight or the speed
of the vehicle and trailer is too high. Pull the vehicle-trailer over to a
safe location to check the trailer weight distribution and tongue load,
and reduce speed to a safe level while towing. If trailer sway is
experienced, SLOW DOWN.
During trailer sway control events, the stability control light in the
instrument cluster will flash momentarily. The message center will also
display TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED. In some cases when trailer
sway is detected, the vehicle speed is too high and may be at or above a
speed at which trailer sway will grow continuously. This may cause the
system to activate multiple times, and you may experience a slight
deceleration of the vehicle.
220

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Disabling trailer sway control
Trailer sway control can be disabled during any key cycle. Refer to
Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information.
Note that even if it was disabled before turning off the vehicle, trailer
sway control will be re-enabled at each new key cycle.
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of
loss of vehicle control, serious injury, or death. Ford does not
recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (e.g., hill climbing), the driver has
significant trailer towing experience, and can control trailer sway and
maintain safe operation.
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by a low power
steering fluid level. Check for a low power steering fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering fluid reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• An improperly inflated tire
• Uneven tire wear
• Loose or worn suspension components
• Loose or worn steering components
• Improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
221

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
BRAKE-SHIFT INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock (BSI) feature that
prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the
ignition is in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer to
Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the
following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P
(Park):
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the
ignition key to the off position, and
remove the key.
2. Using a screwdriver (or similar
tool), carefully pry off and remove
the BSI access panel.

3. Locate the brake shift interlock
lever in front of the shifter
assembly.
4. Apply the brake pedal. Gently
pull and hold the brake shift
interlock lever while pulling the
gearshift lever out of the P (Park)
position and into the N (Neutral)
position.
5. Install the trim panel.
6. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle, and release the parking
brake.
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure
is used.
222

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Automatic transmission adaptive learning
Your transmission is equipped with an adaptive learning strategy found in
the vehicle computer. This feature is designed to increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation. Additionally, whenever the battery is
disconnected or a new battery installed, the strategy must be relearned.
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6–speed automatic
transmission
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission
and prevents the front wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Press the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
223

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with Overdrive
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through six.
M (Manual)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Will downshift to the lowest available gear for the current vehicle
speed; allows for first gear when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Understanding your SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission (SST)
This vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift Automatic™ transmission
(SST) gearshift lever. SST is an automatic transmission with the ability
for the driver to change gears up or down as desired. By moving the
gearshift lever from D (Drive) to M (Manual), you now have control of
selecting the gear you desire using the toggle switch on the gearshift
lever.

224

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving

Gearshift lever toggle switch
• To manually downshift the
transmission with the gearshift
lever in M (Manual), press – on
the gearshift lever.
• To manually upshift the
transmission with the gearshift
lever in M (Manual), press + on
the gearshift lever.

Recommended shift speeds
Upshift according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel
economy)
Shift from:
1-2
15 mph (24 km/h)
2-3
25 mph (40 km/h)
3-4
40 mph (64 km/h)
4-5
45 mph (72 km/h)
5-6
50 mph (80 km/h)
The message center display in the instrument cluster will show the
current selected gear you are in.
In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which
may cause it to stall, the SST will automatically make some downshifts
even if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time. It will
still allow you to downshift at any time as long as the SST determines
that the engine will not be damaged from over-revving.
Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held
without shifting.
225

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Hill start assist (HSA) system
The hill start assist system makes it easier to pull away when the vehicle
is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake. When hill start
assist is active, the vehicle will remain stationary on the slope for up to
three seconds after you release the brake pedal. During this time, you
have time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal and
pull away. The brakes are released automatically once the engine has
developed sufficient drive to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the
slope. This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope; for example
from a car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a
parking space.
WARNING: The hill start assist system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave the vehicle, always apply the
parking brake and select first or reverse gear.
Using hill start assist
Hill start assist is activated automatically when the vehicle is stopped on
a slope greater than five degrees. Hill start assist operates with the
vehicle facing downhill if reverse gear is selected.
WARNING: You must remain in the vehicle once you have
activated hill start assist.
Activating hill start assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill.
Keep the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle is on a slope, hill start assist will
be activated automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, the vehicle will
remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately up to three
seconds. This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the
process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The brakes will be released
automatically.
WARNING: If the engine is revved excessively, or if a
malfunction is detected when hill start assist is active, hill start
assist will be deactivated.
226

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
It may be beneficial to turn the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC system off so
the wheels are allowed to spin.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM
The reverse sensing system (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as
contained in this section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat
surface at “parking speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the
function of the RSS; this may include reduced performance or a false
activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in R (Reverse) and when using the RSS.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
227

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
The RSS detects obstacles up to six
feet (two meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.

While receiving a warning the radio volume will be reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio will return
to the previous value.
The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R
(Reverse) and the ignition is on. A control in the message center allows
the driver to disable the system, refer to Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter for more information.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.

228

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The rear video camera system,
located on the liftgate, provides a
video image of the area behind the
vehicle. It adds assistance to the
driver while reversing or reverse
parking the vehicle. To use the rear
video camera system, place the
transmission in R (Reverse). An
image will display on the
touchscreen display. The area
displayed on the screen may vary
according to the vehicle orientation and/or road condition.
The rear video camera includes the following features that will assist the
driver in reverse driving.
Fixed guidelines
The fixed guidelines assist a driver with backing into a parking space or
aligning with an object behind the vehicle.
To turn this feature on or off when the vehicle is not in R (Reverse), do
the following on the touchscreen:
1. Select Menu
2. Select Vehicle
3. Select Rear View Camera
The fixed guideline options are ON and OFF.
• (1) Rear bumper
• (2) Red zone
• (3) Yellow zone
• (4) Green zone
• (5) Center line of vehicle

229

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Always use caution while backing. Objects in the red zone (2) are closest
to your vehicle and objects in the green zone (4) are further away.
Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green
zone (4) to the yellow (3) or red zones (2). Use the side mirrors and
rearview mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the
vehicle.
Visual park aid alert (if equipped)
Visual park aid alert allows the driver to see the area that is causing the
reverse sensing system to beep. The visual alerts are red, yellow or green
highlights which appear on top of the video image when an object is
detected by the reverse sensing system. The visual alert will highlight
the closest object detected by the reverse sensing system. The reverse
sensing alert can be disabled and if visual park aid alert is enabled,
highlighted areas will still be displayed.
To turn this feature on or off when the vehicle is not in R (Reverse), do
the following on the touchscreen:
1. Select Menu
2. Select Vehicle
3. Select Rear View Camera
The visual park aid alert options are ON and OFF.
Note: The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph
(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.
Manual zoom
The manual zoom feature assists drivers with connecting their vehicle to
a trailer for the purpose of towing. It allows the driver to manually zoom
closer to an object behind the vehicle. The zoomed image keeps the
bumper in the image to provide a reference.
or
to manually adjust the zoom levels. You can choose from
Press
OFF, Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3. The selected level will appear between
the buttons (i.e. Level 1). When activating manual zoom mode, the
system always starts from OFF.
When enabled, Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3 will only be active while the
vehicle is in R (Reverse). The feature disables outside of R (Reverse)
and must be re-enabled the next time the vehicle shifts into R (Reverse).
230

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
When manual zoom is enabled, only
the centerline will be shown.

Zoom

{zoom
level}

Rear camera delay
After shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any gear other than P (Park),
the image will remain until the vehicle speed reaches five mph (8 km/h).
This will only occur if the rear camera delay feature is on, or until any
radio button is selected.
The default setting for the rear camera delay is ON. To turn this feature
on or off when the vehicle is not in R (Reverse), do the following:
1. Select Menu
2. Select Vehicle
3. Select Rear View Camera
The rear camera delay options are ON and OFF.
The camera lens for the reverse camera system is located on the liftgate.
Keep the lens clean so the video image remains clear and undistorted.
Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
When towing, the reverse camera system will only see what is being
towed behind the vehicle. This might not provide adequate coverage as it
usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be
seen.
Fixed guidelines, visual park aid alert and manual zoom features are only
available when the vehicle is in R (Reverse).
If the vehicle is in R (Reverse) and the liftgate is ajar, no rear video
camera features will be displayed. A message will be displayed on the
touchscreen if the liftgate is ajar.
After activating or deactivating a rear video camera feature, the
touchscreen will show a preview of the feature(s) selected.
Note: If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted, it may
be covered with water droplets, snow, mud or any other substance. If
this occurs, clean the camera lens before using the camera system.
231

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
WARNING: The rearview camera system is a reverse aid
supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for
maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: When manual zoom is enabled (Level 1, Level 2 or
Level 3), the full area behind the vehicle will not be shown. Be
aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature.
WARNING: Use caution when using the rear video camera and
the liftgate is ajar. If the liftgate is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines (if
enabled) have been removed when the liftgate is ajar.
WARNING: Use caution when turning ON or OFF camera
features while in R (Reverse). Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged, then check with your
authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper
coverage and operation.
Night time and dark area use
At night time or in dark areas, the camera system relies on the reverse
lamp lighting to produce an image. Therefore, it is necessary that both
reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark. If
either of the lamps are not operating, stop using the camera system, at
least in the dark, until the lamp(s) are replaced and functioning.
Servicing
• If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R (Reverse), have
the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
232

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
• If the image is not clear, check if anything is covering the lens such as
dirt, mud, ice, snow, etc. If the image is still not clear after cleaning,
have your system inspected by your authorized dealer.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The collision warning with brake support, is designed to alert the driver
of certain collision risks with a red warning light located above the
dashboard and an audible warning chime. The brake support assists the
driver in reducing the collision speed, by pre-charging the brakes.
WARNING: This system is designed to be a supplementary
driving aid. It is not intended to replace the driver’s attention,
and judgment, or the need to apply the brakes. This system does NOT
activate the brakes automatically. Failure to press the brake pedal to
activate the brakes may result in a collision.
WARNING: The collision warning system with brake support
cannot help prevent all collisions. Do not rely on this system to
replace driver judgment and the need to maintain distance and speed.
Note: The collision warning with brake support will not detect, warn, or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles to the rear or sides of the
vehicle.
Operation
The radar sensor detects vehicles
ahead that are moving in the same
direction as your vehicle.
If the radar detects that your
vehicle is rapidly closing on another
vehicle a red warning light will
illuminate and an audible warning
chime will sound.

233

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
After that, if the risk of collision further increases after the warning light,
the brake support prepares the brake system for rapid braking. This may
be apparent to the driver. However, the system will not automatically
activate the brakes. The vehicle will not stop unless the driver presses
the brake pedal. If the brake pedal is pressed then braking is
implemented with full brake function, even if the force on the brake
pedal is light.
The collision warning system is active at speeds above approximately
5 mph (8 km/h).
Collision warning system limitations
Due to the nature of radar technology, there may be certain instances
where vehicles will not provide a collision warning. These include:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see also blocked sensor section).
• Debris build-up on the grille near the headlamps (see block sensor
section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Steering wheel and pedal movements are large (very active driving
style).
• High interior temperatures, which may deactivate the illumination or
the warning lamps until the interior temperature reduces (audible
warning will alert the driver).
In addition, sun load and sunglasses may reduce the visibility of the
warning lamps. Therefore, it is recommended to keep the audible
warning on.
WARNING: The collision warning system’s brake support can
only help reduce the speed at which a collision occurs if the
driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedal must be pressed
just like for any typical braking situation.

234

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Blocked sensor
If a message regarding a blocked
sensor is displayed, the radar signals
from the sensor, located behind a
fascia cover near the driver side of
the lower grille, have been
obstructed. When the radar signals
are obstructed, a vehicle ahead
cannot be detected and the collision
warning system will not function.
The following table lists possible
causes and actions for this message being displayed.
Cause
The surface of the radar in the
grille is dirty or obstructed in
some way
The surface of the radar in the
grille is clean but the message
remains in the display
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is
interfering with the radar signals

Swirling water, or snow or ice on
the surface of the road may
interfere with the radar signals

Action
Clean the grille surface in front of
the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction
Wait a short time. It may take
several minutes for the radar to
detect that it is no longer
obstructed
The collision warning system is
temporarily disabled. Collision
warning should automatically
reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve.
The collision warning system is
temporarily disabled. Collision
warning should automatically
reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve.

Activating/deactivating collision warning system
To turn the warning system and/or chime on or off and set the warning
sensitivity <– –>, refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
Note: If the system cannot be turned off in a MyKey™ equipped vehicle,
refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
235

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Note: If collision warnings are perceived as being too frequent or
disturbing then the warning sensitivity can be reduced, though the
manufacturer recommends using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later system
warnings. Refer to the Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for instructions on reducing the sensitivity.
BLIND SPOT MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex spotter mirror built into
the upper outboard corner of the outside mirrors. They are designed to
assist the driver by increasing visibility along the side of the vehicle. For
more information on your side view mirrors, refer to Exterior mirrors in
the Driver Controls chapter.
Driving with blind spot mirrors
Before a lane change, check the
main mirror first, then check the
blind spot mirror. If no vehicles are
present in the blind spot mirror and
the traffic in the adjacent lane is at
a safe distance, signal that you are
going to change lanes. Glance over
3
your shoulder to verify traffic is
clear, and carefully change lanes.
When the approaching vehicle is at
a distance, its image is small and
near the inboard edge of the main
2
mirror. As the vehicle approaches,
the image becomes larger and
begins to move outboard across the
main mirror (1). As the vehicle
approaches its image will transition
1
from the main mirror and begin to
appear in the blind spot mirror (2).
As the vehicle leaves the blind spot
mirror it will transition to the driver’s peripheral field of view (3).
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they
appear.

236

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS姞) WITH CROSS
TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) (IF EQUIPPED)
The BLIS威 is a convenience feature
that aids the driver in assessing
whether a vehicle is within an area
on either side of the vehicle
extending rearward from the outside
mirrors to approximately 10 feet
(3 meters) beyond the bumper. This
area is referred to as the blind zone.
The BLIS威 will alert the driver to
the presence of motorized vehicles
in these areas while driving on roads
and freeways.
The system is not designed to
prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects. The system is designed
to provide a warning to assist the
driver in detecting vehicles in the blind zones. The system will not detect
infrastructure, pedestrians, or cyclists.
WARNING: To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the BLIS威 as a
replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking
over your shoulder before changing lanes. BLIS威 is not a replacement
for careful driving and only an assist.
The BLIS威 and CTA has a yellow
indicator (also referred to as the
alert) located in the left and right
exterior mirrors. When the vehicle is
started, the BLIS威 automatically
illuminates both indicators for
several seconds indicating the
system is operating. The first time
you place the transmission in D (Drive) after starting the engine and
drive forward at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) the BLIS威 system
becomes active. Afterwards, the BLIS威 remains active for all speeds
including zero mph. BLIS威 is also active if the transmission is placed in N
(Neutral). If the transmission is shifted out of D (Drive) or N (Neutral)
the system will enter the CTA mode (see CTA operation below). Once
shifted back in to D (Drive) the BLIS威 mode will activate once driven
above 3 mph (5 km/h).
237

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
The BLIS威 will trigger the alert for vehicles that enter your blind zone
from the rear or merge in to the blind zone from the side. Vehicles that
you pass, or a vehicle that enters the blind zone from the front, will
trigger the alert only after the vehicle is present in the blind zone for
three seconds. Note: For vehicles that pass through the blind zone
quickly, typically less than two seconds, the BLIS威 will not illuminate the
alert.
The BLIS威 consists of two radar
sensors each located rearward of
the rear wheels hidden behind the
bumper fascia. Do not place any
type of bumper sticker in this area.
Note: The BLIS威 typically will not
detect parked vehicles, humans,
animals, or infrastructure (fences,
guard rails, trees, etc.). The BLIS威
does not function when the transmission is in R (Reverse) or P (Park).
The BLIS威 does not provide any additional warning when your turn
signal is activated.
BLIS威 detection limitations: Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where vehicles entering and exiting the
blind spot zones may not be detected. Below is a list of circumstances
that may cause non-detection:
• Debris build-up on the rear quarter panel fascias
• Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering and exiting the blind zone
• Vehicles passing through the blind zone at very fast rates
• Severe weather conditions
• When several vehicles forming a convoy pass through the blind zone.
BLIS威 False Alerts
Due to the nature of radar technology, there may be certain instances
when the BLIS威 will alert with no object present in the blind zone. This
is known as a false alert. Some level of false alerts are normal.
Circumstances that may cause a false alert are guardrails, freeway
concrete walls, cyclone fencing, sharp turns around a pole or building, or
coming to a stop with a vehicle directly behind but very close. False
alerts are temporary and self correct.

238

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Cross traffic alert (CTA) system operation
The CTA system warns the driver of approaching vehicles when R
(Reverse) is selected and the vehicle is backing out of a front-in parking
spot. It sounds a series of tones and flashes the BLIS威 indicator found on
the exterior mirror on the side of the approaching vehicle. Additionally,
the message center will display either, VEHICLE COMING FROM RIGHT
or VEHICLE COMING FROM LEFT to warn the driver from which
direction vehicles are approaching.
The system is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or
objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver
in detecting vehicles in the blind zones. The system will not detect
infrastructure, pedestrians, or bicyclists.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, NEVER use the CTA
system as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors
and looking over your shoulder before backing out of a parking space.
CTA is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist.
The CTA system detects vehicles approaching up to 45 feet (14 meters)
away. Coverage decreases when vehicles and objects in close proximity
block the CTA sensors (refer to figure for approximate zone coverage
areas [sensor obstructed for vehicle on left]). Backing slowly from
the parking spot in these situations helps to increase the sensor coverage
and effectiveness.

239

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
CTA coverage also decreases when parking at shallow angles (refer to
figure for approximate zone coverage areas [sensor obstructed for
vehicle on left]).

CTA detection limitations: Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where vehicles entering and exiting the
blind spot zones may not be detected. Below is a list of circumstances
that may cause non-detection:
• Debris build-up on the rear quarter panel fascias
• The rear quarter panel radar beams are obstructed or partially
obstructed by an adjacently parked vehicle or object.
• Approaching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h)
• Severe weather conditions
• Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph (5 km/h)
• Backing out of an angled parking spot
CTA false alerts
Due to the nature of radar technology, there may be certain instances
when the BLIS威 will alert with no object present when backing up. This
is known as a false alert. Some level of false alerts are normal.
Circumstances that may cause a false alert when backing up are backing
out of a garage, backing in to a parking space, and objects very close to
the sensor. False alerts are temporary and self correct.
240

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
CTA and reverse sensing system (RSS) interaction
CTA works along with the reverse sensing system (RSS) (if equipped).
Become familiar with the warning tones of both systems.
BLIS威 and/or CTA on/off and disable operation
The BLIS威 and/or the CTA can be turned off via the message center. If
either the BLIS威 and/or the CTA is turned off, the systems will
automatically turn back on at the next ignition key cycle. When either
the BLIS威 and/or the CTA is turned off, the message center displays
BLIND SPOT SYS OFF and/or CTA SYSTEM OFF. When the BLIS威
and/or the CTA system is off, the driver will not receive alerts. Refer to
Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Note: If the system cannot be turned off, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks
and Security chapter for more information.
The BLIS威 and/or the CTA can be disabled permanently even after an
ignition key cycle. This must be done by your authorized dealer. Note:
Once either of the systems are disabled, enabling must also be performed
at the dealership. When disabled, the message center will display BLIND
SPOT DISABLED and/or CTA DISABLED.
BLIS威 and/or CTA fault operation
If the BLIS威 and/or CTA senses a fault on either the left or right sensor,
the BLIS威 alert indicator will go on and remain on and the message
center will display BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT or CROSS TRAFFIC
SYSTEM FAULT. For faults that may cause the associated left or right
alert indicator not to illuminate, only the message center faults will
occur.
Blocked sensor
An extreme build-up of materials on
the quarter panel fascias such as
mud or snow can cause degraded
performance of the BLIS威. Also,
heavy rain can cause the same
effect. The BLIS威 can detect this
degraded performance and issue a
blocked warning to the driver via
the message center. If a condition is determined by the system, the
message center displays BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE or CROSS
TRAFFIC NOT AVAILABLE warning and the appropriate left and/or right
exterior mirror alert indicator will illuminate. The message center
warning may be cleared by the driver but the exterior mirror alert
indicator will remain illuminated.
241

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
WARNING: Just prior to the system recognizing a blocked
condition and alerting the driver, the number of missed objects
will increase. To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the BLIS威 as a
replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over
your shoulder before changing lanes. BLIS威 is not a replacement for
careful driving and only an assist.
Once the blockage is removed, the system will require some driving time
and detection of at least two vehicle objects prior to resetting or the
driver can cycle the ignition key. If, however, blockage is still present
after the key cycle, the system will sense again that it is blocked after
driving in traffic.
The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message
being displayed:
The surface of the radar is dirty or Clean the fascia area in front of
obstructed in some way
the radar, either side, or remove
obstruction.
The surface of the radar is not
Drive normally in traffic for a few
dirty or obstructed
minutes to allow the radar to
detect that it is no longer blocked.
Note: The vehicle must be in D
(Drive) and a few vehicles must
pass so that the BLIS威 can clear a
blocked state.
Heavy rainfall or heavy snowfall is No action required by the driver.
interfering with the radar signals
The system will automatically reset
to an unblocked state once the
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or
stops. Do not use BLIS威 and/or
CTA in heavy rainfall or heavy
snowfall.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage
warning and not be blocked. This is rare and known as a false blockage
warning. A false blocked condition will either self clear or clear after a
key cycle.

242

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Trailer tow false alerts
When towing a trailer, the sensors may detect the trailer thus causing a
false alert. It may be desirable to turn the BLIS威 off if the false alerts
become annoying.
Day and night brightness
The BLIS威 and/or CTA alert will automatically dim when the headlamp
switch is in PARK, ON, or AUTO ON and night time darkness has been
detected by the sun sensor.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-time all-wheel drive (AWD)
system. The AWD system is an active system, meaning it not only
responds to wheel slip between the front and rear axles but also has the
ability to anticipate wheel slip and transfer torque to the rear wheels
before slip occurs. The AWD system is active all the time and requires no
input from the operator.
All components of the AWD system are sealed for life and require no
maintenance.
Note: When an AWD system fault is present, the warning CHECK AWD
will display in the message center. The AWD system is not functioning
correctly and defaulted to front-wheel drive. When this warning is
displayed, have your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer
If your vehicle is equipped with AWD, a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided should never be used. If the spare tire is
installed, the AWD system may disable automatically and enter
front-wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components. This
condition may be indicated by an AWD OFF message in the message
center (see Message center section in the Instrument Cluster chapter
for more information). If there is an AWD OFF message in the message
center from using the spare tire, this indicator should turn off after
reinstalling the repaired or replaced normal road tire and driving a short
distance. It is recommended to reinstall the repaired or replaced road
tire as soon as possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and
rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default
to front-wheel drive or damage the AWD system.
Note: The AWD OFF message may also be displayed in the message
center if the AWD system has overheated and defaulted to front-wheel
drive. This condition may occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme
conditions with excessive wheel slip, such as deep sand. To resume
normal AWD function as soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe
243

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
location and allow it to idle. The AWD OFF message will turn off when
the system cools and normal AWD function returns.
Note: The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road
capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free
and otherwise similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating
your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle
to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered
under your warranty.
Driving off-highway with AWD vehicles
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough
roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different
from conventional vehicles, both on and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds off-highway under high outside
temperatures, use L (Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Basic operating principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
244

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac威 with Roll Stability
Control™, it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac威 with Roll
Stability Control™ system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle (i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
245

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
AWD systems (if equipped)
With AWD, the vehicle uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This
increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions
that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep sand for an extended period of
time. This will cause the AWD system to overheat. If the rear tires stop
spinning while the front tires spin in deep sand, turn off the vehicle and
allow the AWD system to cool down for a minimum of 15 minutes. After
the system has cooled down, normal AWD function will return. When
driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures,
use L (Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation will maximize
the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs
(for trucks) (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
246

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant and
PTU (power transfer unit) lubricant should be checked and changed if
necessary.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround because you might roll over.
It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.

247

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have
to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do
not “pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Since
your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS),
do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter
for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system.
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require
tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously.
Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle
slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you
regain control of the vehicle.
248

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Driving
Maintenance and modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
off-highway usage.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.

249

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24-hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner Guide portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford and Lincoln eligible vehicles towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.

250

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Canadian customers refer to your Warranty Guide or visit our
website at www.ford.ca for information on:
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Warranty Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside
Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1-800-665-2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford and Lincoln vehicle customers call
1-800-241-3673. Customers will be asked to submit their original
receipts.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1-800-665-2006 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher control is located
on the instrument panel by the
radio. The hazard flashers will
operate when the ignition is in any
position or if the key is not in the
ignition.
• Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will
flash.
• Press the flasher control again to turn them off.
Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.

251

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature, you may
restart your vehicle by doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the off position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the on position.
In some instances the vehicle may not restart the first time you try to
restart and may take one additional attempt.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected
by an authorized dealer after any collision.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
15
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.

252

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating

Mini
fuses

Standard
fuses

Maxi
fuses

2A
3A
4A
5A
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A

Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural

Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
Natural
Natural
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
—
Brown
Black
Black

Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located behind a trim panel on the left side of the
driver’s footwell near the parking brake. To remove the trim panel, slide
the release lever to the right then pull the trim panel out.
To remove the fuse panel cover, press in the tabs on both sides of the
cover, then pull the cover off.
To reinstall the fuse panel cover, place the top part of the cover on the
fuse panel, then push the bottom part of the cover until it clicks into
place. Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is secure.
To reinstall the trim panel, align the tabs on the bottom of the panel with
the grooves, push the panel shut and slide the release lever to the left to
secure the panel.
To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
253

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9
40

49
10
22

11
12
13
14
15
16

The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Fuse Amp
Rating
30A
15A
30A
10A
20A
5A
7.5A

8
9
10
11

10A
10A
10A
10A

254

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Protected Circuits
Driver front smart window
Not used (spare)
Passenger front smart window
Demand lamps
Subwoofer
RF module
Power mirror switch, Memory seat
switch, Driver seat module
Not used (spare)
Power liftgate
Run/accessory relay
Instrument panel cluster,
Heads-up display

Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
12

Fuse Amp
Rating
15A

15A

16
17
18

10A
10A
10A

19
20

20A
20A

21
22
23

10A
20A
15A

15A

25
26

15A
5A

20A

Protected Circuits
Interior lighting, Puddle lamps,
Backlighting
Right turn/stop lamps and turn
signals
Left turn/stop lamps and turn
signals
Reverse lamps, Stop lamps
(high-mounted)
Low beam headlamps (right)
Low beam headlamps (left)
Keypad illumination, Brake shift
interlock (BSI), Passenger
compartment fuse panel, Start
button LED, Passive anti-theft
system (PATS), Powertrain
control module (PCM) wake-up,
2nd row power enable
Audio amplifier
Lock/unlock relays – vehicles
without intelligent access (IA)
Not used (spare)
Horn relay
Steering wheel control, Intelligent
access (IA), Headlamp switch
Power tilt/telescope steering
column, On-board diagnostics
(OBDII)
Liftgate release
Global positioning system (GPS)
module
Intelligent access (IA)

255

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
28

Fuse Amp
Rating
15A

20A

30
31
32

15A
5A
15A

33
34

10A
10A

35
36
37
38
39
40

5A
10A
10A
10A
15A
10A

7.5A

42
43
44
45
46
47
48

5A
10A
10A
5A
10A
15A
30A Circuit
Breaker
—

49
256

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Protected Circuits
Ignition switch (without IA), Key
inhibit solenoid, Push button start
(with IA)
Radio, Electronic finish panel,
SYNC威 module
Front park lamps
Not used (spare)
Moon roof, Power windows,
Compass/auto-dimming rear view
mirror
Not used (spare)
Reverse sensing system, Rearview
camera, Blind spot monitor, Rear
heated seat module
Heads-up display
Heated steering wheel
Climate control
Not used (spare)
High beam headlamps
Rear park lamps, License plate
lamps
Occupant classification sensor
(OCS), Restraints control module
Not used (spare)
Not used (spare)
Not used (spare)
Not used (spare)
Climate control
Fog lamps,
Power windows
Delayed accessory relay

Roadside Emergencies
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

1
16

2
17

15
14

56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65

45 46 47 48 49 50 51
66
67 68 69 70 71 72

52
73
74

78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87

88
89 90 91 92 93

75
76
96
97

77
98

257

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
2
3
4
5

Fuse Amp
Rating
—
—
—
30A**
40A**

6
7
8
9
10
11

—
30A**
20A**
20A**
—
—

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

—
—
—
—
—
—
40A**
30A**
20A**
20A**
—
30A**
—
—
40A**
20A**
30A**

258

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Power Distribution Box
Description
Not used
Not used
Not used
Wipers
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
pump
Not used
Power liftgate
Moon roof
Power point #2 (console rear)
Not used
Rear window defroster/heated
mirror relay
Not used
Starter relay
Not used
Fuel pump relay
Not used
Not used
Blower motor
Starter motor
Power point #1 (console bin)
Cargo area power point
Not used
Driver seat module
Not used
Not used
Rear window defroster
Front power point/lighter
Climate controlled seats

Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Fuse Amp
Rating
—
30A**
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

38
39

—
40A**
60A**
40A**
—
30A**
30A**
—
5A*
—
—
—
—
15A*
—
—
—
—
—
—

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56

Power Distribution Box
Description
Not used
Rear heated seats
Not used
Not used
Not used
Blower motor relay
Not used
Rear seat relay
Right trailer tow (TT) stop/turn
lamps relay
Not used
Cooling fan (vehicles with TT)
Cooling fan (vehicles without TT)
Cooling fan (TT only)
Not used
Passenger seat
ABS valves
Rear washer relay
Rain sensor
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Heated mirror
Not used
Not used
Left TT stop/turn lamps relay
Not used
Wiper relay
Not used

259

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
57

Fuse Amp
Rating
20A*

58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66

10A*
10A*
—
10A*
10A*
15A*
20A*
15A*
—

67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85

20A*
15A*
15A*
10A*
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
20A*
5A*
—
—
15A*
—
20A*
—

260

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Power Distribution Box
Description
Left high-intensity discharge
(HID) headlamps
Alternator sensor
Brake on/off switch
Not used
Rear seat release
A/C clutch
TT stop/turn lamps relay
Rear wiper motor
Fuel pump
Powertrain control module
(PCM) relay
Vehicle power (VPWR) #2
VPWR #4
VPWR #1
A/C relay, All-wheel drive module
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
A/C clutch diode
Not used
TT park lamps relay
Right HID headlamps
Adaptive cruise control
Not used
Not used
Rear washer
Not used
TT park lamps
Not used

Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94

Fuse Amp
Rating
7.5A*
5A*
—
5A*
10A*
10A*
10A*
5A*
30A**

95
96
97
98
* Mini Fuses ** Cartridge

—
—
—
—
Fuses

Power Distribution Box
Description
PCM keep-alive, PCM relay
Run/start relay
Run/start relay
Adaptive lighting
PCM
Adaptive cruise control
ABS module
Blower motor/rear defroster relay
Passenger compartment fuse
panel run/start
Not used
Not used
Not used
A/C clutch relay

CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality
of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare
tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for
damage.
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) and should not be used.
However, if you must use a sealant, the TPMS sensor and valve stem
on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
261

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it
will no longer function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire

262

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
263

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Stopping and securing the vehicle
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set the parking
brake.
2. Place the gearshift lever in P
(Park) and turn the engine off.

Removing the spare tire and jack
1. Lift the carpeted load floor panel
located in the rear of the vehicle.
2. Remove the spare tire cover (if
equipped).
3. Remove the wing nut securing
the spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Remove the washer.
5. Lift and remove the temporary
spare tire from the cargo area.
6. Remove the jack assembly from
the vehicle. Loosen the bag tabs and
remove the jack and lug wrench
from the bag.
7. Fold down the wrench socket
used to loosen the lug nuts and
operate the jack.

Tire change procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park).

264

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure to place the transmission in P (Park), set
the parking brake and block (in both directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire
being changed.
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
1. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.

2. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.

WARNING: To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any
part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not
start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only
meant for changing the tire.
265

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
3. Align the slot on top of the jack
with the sheet metal flange
indicated by the jack locator triangle
next to the tire you are changing.
Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the wheel is completely off the
ground.
4. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
5. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve
stem is facing outward. Reinstall the
lug nuts until the wheel is snug
against the hub. Do not fully tighten
the lug nuts until the wheel has
been lowered.
6. Lower the wheel by turning the
jack handle counterclockwise.

7. Remove the jack and fully tighten
the lug nuts in the order shown.
Refer to Wheel lug nut torque
specifications later in this chapter
for the proper lug nut torque
specification.

Stowing the flat/spare tire and jack
1. Fully collapse the jack, fold the wrench socket into the handle and
place them both into the bag making sure to secure the tabs.
2. Place the jack assembly in the spare tire well aligning it with the two
vertical studs.
3. Place the tire in the spare tire well over the jack assembly.

266

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
If you are stowing a flat 22 inch tire and wheel assembly,
temporarily remove the load floor, plastic stowage bins (if equipped), and
the foam load floor supports to make space for the 22 inch tire and
wheel assembly. Place the 22 inch tire & wheel assembly in the spare tire
well with the valve stem facing down. Rotate the tire until the jack
assembly is able to protrude through a wheel opening. Replace the
plastic stowage bins (if equipped) and foam load floor supports around
the 22 inch tire and wheel assembly.
If you are stowing a flat tire, place the tire in the spare tire well with
the valve stem facing down. Rotate the tire until the jack assembly is
able to protrude through a wheel opening.
If you are stowing the spare tire, place the spare in the spare tire
well in its original position.
4. Secure the wheel by replacing the washer and the wing nut and
turning the wing nut clockwise.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Lug nut socket
Wheel lug nut torque*
size/Bolt size
ft-lb
N•m
100
135
Lug nut socket size: 3⁄4
inch (19 mm) hex
Bolt size: 1⁄2 x 20
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.

267

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
prior to installation. If there is
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lugnut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
If you have run out of fuel and need to refill the vehicle with a portable
fuel container, see Running out of fuel in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter for proper fuel filling method using a portable
fuel container and the included fuel filler funnel. Do not insert the
nozzle of portable fuel containers or any type of aftermarket funnels into
the Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system as it can be damaged. You must
use the included funnel in such circumstances.
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto
the ground instead of filling the tank, all of which could result in
serious personal injury.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
268

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.

269

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies

4
+

–
+

–

1. Connect the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the
positive (+) cable to the positive
(+) terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to
the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s
engine, away from the battery and
the carburetor/fuel injection system.

3
2

Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both
engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.

270

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
Removing the jumper cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.

–

Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
1. Remove the jumper cable from
the ground metal surface.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
4
D
1
D
A
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
+
3. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
2
B
+

3
C

After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.

271

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING

If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor
Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
On FWD vehicles, if your vehicle is to be towed from the front, ensure
proper wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the
ground. The rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this
fashion.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, it
is recommended that the front wheels (drive wheels) be placed on a
dolly to prevent damage to the automatic transmission.
On AWD vehicles, it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel
lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground to
prevent damage to the automatic transmission, AWD system or vehicle.
272

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Roadside Emergencies
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
Emergency towing
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward
direction.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral). Refer to Brake-shift interlock
in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the
gear shift lever into N (Neutral).
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).

273

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft威 parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized
by Ford.
Away from home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.genuineservice.com.
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Guides
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
274

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Mailing address (Ford vehicles)
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Mailing address (Lincoln vehicles)
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.lincolncanada.com
Additional assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
275

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126

276

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE
before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose
to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act,
resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section,
you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not
want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may
participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be
scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting
before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided
within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not
bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are
admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB
AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance
letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
277

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces.
For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP
Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
278

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands, Central
America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel
free to call our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD (3673).
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford International Business Development Inc.
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00922-1957
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr

279

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the
Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford Middle East
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 21470
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 800 89717409
Local Telephone Number for Kuwait: 24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the
above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global
Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed
previously in this section.
280

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510, or online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

281

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42) which is available from your authorized dealer.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
Exterior chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• Use Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from
your authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to
clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a
few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.

282

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or
cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove
brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.

283

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (CXC-66-A).
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.

• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
284

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A) in
the U.S., or Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid [CXC-37-(A, B,
D, or F)] in Canada, available from your authorized dealer. This
washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which
helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and
windshield from automated car wash facilities. Be sure to replace
wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
PANORAMIC ROOF DEFLECTOR (IF EQUIPPED)
Vacuum the wind deflector cloth to remove insects & loose dirt. Clean
with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner
(ZC-54).
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean, damp, white cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry white cotton
cloth to dry these areas.
285

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior
surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be
covered by your warranty.
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft威 Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use
Motorcraft威 Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).
286

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
LEATHER SEATS
(IF EQUIPPED, EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH姞 EDITION)
For King Ranch威 leather seats, refer to a separate section in this
chapter.
• Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible.
• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93). Dry the
area with a soft cloth.
• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
• To check for compatibility, first test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing or
damage to the leather.
LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCH姞 EDITION ONLY
(IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium, top-grain
leather which is extremely durable, but still requires special care and
maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the
leather.
Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft
brush.
287

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution.
• Clean spills as quickly as possible.
• Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the
leather as cleaners may darken the leather.
• Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based
products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics.
Scratches
Natural Markings - Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine
steer hides, there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings, such
as small scars. These markings give character to the seating covers and
should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product.
In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear
marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same
instructions as in the Conditioning section.
Conditioning
Bottles of King Ranch威 Leather Conditioner are available at the King
Ranch威 Saddle Shop. Visit the website at www.krsaddleshop.com, or
telephone (in the United States) 1–800–282–KING (5464). If you are
unable to obtain King Ranch威 Leather Conditioner, use another premium
leather conditioner.
• Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section.
• Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of
conditioner to a clean, dry cloth.
• Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior. If a
film appears, wipe off film with a dry, clean cloth.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.

288

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Cleaning
FORD AND LINCOLN CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality
products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive
needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and
appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft威 Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft威 Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft威 Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft威 Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada only)
[CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft威 Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)

289

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to
find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft威 parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.

290

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel near
the steering column.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the secondary hood latch
located under the front passenger
side of the hood.

3. Lift the hood and support it with the prop rod.

291

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Battery
5. Power distribution box
6. Air filter assembly
7. Transmission fluid dipstick
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Engine oil filler cap
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

292

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. Do not use any
special washer fluid such as
windshield water repellent type fluid
or bug wash. They may cause
squeaking, chatter noise, streaking and smearing. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Press the lock
tab to release the blade and pull the
wiper blade down toward the
windshield to remove it from the
arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
293

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
Changing rear window wiper blade
The rear wiper arm is designed without a service position. This reduces
the risk of damage to the blade in an automatic car wash.
To replace the wiper blade:
1. Grab the wiper arm with one
hand close to the arm/blade joint
and pull it as far away from the
glass as possible. Do not use
excessive force because it can break
the wiper arm at the heel. Hold it
there until the next step.
2. Grab the primary structure of the
blade with the other hand close to
the arm/blade joint.
3. Grip tightly and press on the arm/blade joint from beneath and
separate the blade from the arm.
4. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
If you find this procedure too
difficult, please see your dealer.

ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
294

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert
the dipstick fully, then remove it
again.

• If the oil level is within this
range, the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.

• If the oil level is below this
mark, engine oil must be added
to raise the level within the
normal operating range.

295

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
• If required, add engine oil to the engine. Refer to Adding engine oil
in this chapter.
• Do not overfill the engine
with oil. Oil levels above this
mark may cause engine
damage. If the engine is
overfilled, some oil must be
removed from the engine by an
authorized dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range, add
only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the
engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until it stops.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.

296

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the
current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft威 SAE
5W-20 or an equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C930-A. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and
durability performance meeting all requirements for your
vehicle’s engine. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities later in this chapter for more information.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and Motorcraft威 replacement oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft威 oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft威 maintenance-free
battery which normally does not
require additional water during its
life of service.

If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
297

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the
vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery
performance and durability.
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

298

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications

LE
AD

Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE

299

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Battery management system
The Battery Management System (BMS) monitors battery conditions and
takes actions to extend battery life. With the engine off, the audio system
may turn off due to low battery state of charge conditions or the ignition
has been in accessory position or on position with the engine off for
approximately 45 minutes. A message may be displayed on the
instrument cluster or center stack display to alert the driver that battery
protection actions are active. See the Message Center in the Instrument
Cluster section and Entertainment Systems section for more
information. These messages are only for notification that an action is
taking place, and do not necessarily indicate that an electrical problem
exists or that the battery requires replacement.
Electrical accessory installation
To ensure proper operation of the BMS, any electrical devices that are
added to the vehicle should not have their ground connection made
directly at the negative battery post. A connection at the negative
battery post can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition
and potential incorrect system operation.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories added to the vehicle may
adversely affect battery performance and durability and may also affect
the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle.
When a battery replacement is required, the battery should only be
replaced with a Ford recommended replacement battery that matches
the electrical requirements of the vehicle.
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water.
Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze
tester. The level of coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD
level or within the COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir. If the
level falls below, add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine
coolant section.

300

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50/50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Improved freeze protection.
• Improved boiling protection .
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Proper function of calibrated gauges.
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.

• The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level, or within the
COLD FILL or MIN / MAX range as listed on the engine coolant
reservoir (depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained. If coolant is
filled to the COLD FILL RANGE or FULL COLD level when the engine is
not cool, the system will remain underfilled.
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
301

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle.
Make sure the correct coolant is used. DO NOT MIX recycled coolant
and new (unused) coolant together in the vehicle. Mixing of engine
coolants may harm your engine’s cooling system. The use of an
improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components
and may void the warranty. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
distilled water to the FULL COLD level. For all other vehicles which have
a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
following these steps:
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
302

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture, to
within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir.
If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator
until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50, drain
some coolant and adjust the concentration. It may take several drains
and additions to obtain a 50/50 coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
303

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% will provide improved freeze
point protection. Increased engine coolant concentrations above
60% will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the
engine coolant and may cause engine damage.
• If available, refer to the chart on the coolant container to
ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide
adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you
drive in the winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion/freeze protection characteristics of the
engine coolant and may cause engine damage.
• If available, refer to the chart on the coolant container to
ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide
adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The service engine soon
304

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

symbol will illuminate.

Maintenance and Specifications
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
• The engine will completely shut down.
• Steering and braking effort will increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only.
Operate the vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to
bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down
without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist,
and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash
resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
305

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
306

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, or
skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals,
serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the
skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a
physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
Refueling

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling. It can ignite
fuel vapors.
307

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system
Your fuel tank is equipped with an Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel filler
system. This allows you to simply open the fuel filler door and insert the
fuel filler nozzle into the fuel system. The Easy Fuel™ system is
self-sealing and protected against dust, dirt, water and snow/ice.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system and leave
the nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping. Pump fuel as
normal.
4. After you are done pumping fuel, wait about five seconds before
slowly removing the fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain
back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank. Do
not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel
filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located within
the fuel filler housing and to the ground.
If the check fuel fill inlet light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message
comes on, the fuel fill inlet may not have properly closed. The inlet may
have stuck open or debris may be preventing the inlet from fully closing.
At the next opportunity, safely pull off the road, turn off the engine,
open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill
opening. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel (see
Refilling with a portable fuel container for funnel location) provided
with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and/or allow the
inlet to close properly. If this action corrects the problem, the check fuel
fill inlet light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message may not reset
308

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the check fuel fill inlet
light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message to turn off. A driving cycle
consists of an engine start-up (after four or more hours with the engine
off) followed by city/highway driving. Continuing to drive with the check
fuel fill inlet light or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message on may cause
the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded
fuel or any other fuel. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and
could damage your vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with a
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some stations offer fuels posted as
(R+M)/2 METHOD
“Regular” with an octane rating
below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with octane levels
below 87 are not recommended.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.

309

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded
gasoline. Premium unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles
designed to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these
problems to become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your
authorized dealer.
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the right
fuel section.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal. With keyless ignition, just start the engine. Crank time
will be longer than usual.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The service engine soon
indicator may come on. For more
information on the service engine soon indicator, refer to Warning
lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
310

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Refilling with a portable fuel container
With the Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system, use the following directions
when filling from a portable fuel container:
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto
the ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy
Fuel™ system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the
funnel included with the vehicle.
1. After lifting the trunk cargo
cover, locate the white plastic
funnel. It is attached to the rear,
lower edge of the spare tire
compartment.

2. Slowly insert the funnel into the
Easy Fuel™ system.

3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container.
311

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels
can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose
of the funnel. Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not work with
the Easy Fuel™ system and can damage it. The included funnel has
been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking
fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
312

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
313

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle may reduce fuel economy at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example; bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
314

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft威 or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
indicator, charging system
Illumination of the service engine soon
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.

315

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the service
engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine
indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
soon
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel™
“no cap” fuel system in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
indicator remains on, have your vehicle
If the service engine soon
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
indicator on can
continued driving with the service engine soon
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
316

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
indicator is on or not working
test if the service engine soon
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
indicator is on or the bulb does not
If the service engine soon
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to On-board
diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
soon
indicator stays on
ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.

317

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to scheduled maintenance
information.
1. Start the engine and let it run
until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area
between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the
steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper
fluid type.
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the MIN and
MAX lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range, the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer
immediately.

318

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off until normal operating temperatures are reached to
allow the fluid to cool before checking. Depending on vehicle use,
cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or longer.
WARNING: The dipstick cap and surrounding components may
be hot; gloves are recommended.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow a minimum of 10 seconds for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube by
turning it to the locked position.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated areas for normal operating temperature.

319

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Low fluid level
If the fluid level is below the MIN
MIN
MAX
range of the dipstick, add fluid to
reach the hash mark level. Note: If
the fluid level is below the MIN
level, do not drive the vehicle. An underfill condition may cause shift
and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 180°F-200°F (82°C-93°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles
(30 km) of driving.
The transmission fluid level should
be targeted within the cross-hatch
area if at normal operating
temperature 180°F-200°F
(82°C-93°C) .
High fluid level
If the fluid level is above the MAX
MIN
MAX
range of the dipstick, remove fluid
to reach the hashmark level. Note:
Fluid level above the MAX level may
cause shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition. If your
vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city
traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off until normal operating temperatures are reached. Depending
on vehicle use, cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or longer.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this
chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.

320

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint
(250 ml) increments through the
filler tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
MIN
MAX
should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns
and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. Refer to Motorcraft威 part numbers in this chapter.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element
1. Release the clamps that secure
the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully separate the two halves
of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element
from the air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and
cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered
air to enter the engine if not properly seated.
321

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
6. Replace the air filter housing
cover and secure the clamps. Be
sure that the air cleaner cover tabs
are engaged into the slots of the air
cleaner housing.

Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time
(30 days or more), refer to the following maintenance recommendations
to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for
reliable, regular driving. Long term storage under various conditions may
lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are
taken to preserve the components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to
protect against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and underside of front fenders.
See the Cleaning chapter for more information.
• Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax
to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is
washed. See the Cleaning chapter for more information.
• Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges, and latches with a light
grade oil. See the Cleaning chapter for more information.
322

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
Engine
• The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contain contaminates that may cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the
engine is running.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff
of the fuel pump nozzle.
Note: During extended periods of vehicle storage (30 days or more),
fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. Add Motorcraft威 Gas Stabilizer or
equivalent meeting Ford material specification ESE-M99C112-A to the
vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage periods exceed
30 days. Follow the instructions on the additive label. The vehicle should
then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive throughout the
fuel system.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm there are no cooling system leaks, and fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the
battery, it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure
battery charge is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset
memory features.
Brakes
• Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
323

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under vehicle are
covered with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15 days to lubricate
working parts and prevent corrosion.
Removing vehicle from storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on
window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
• Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive the vehicle 15 ft (4.5 meters) back
and forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there
are no leaks, and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If the battery was removed, clean the battery cable ends and inspect.
If you have any concerns or issues, contact your authorized dealer.
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
Engine air filter element
Battery
Oil filter
Spark plugs
1

3.7L V6 engine
FA-1884
BXT-65
FL-500-S
SP-5201

Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft威 or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
324

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

—

5.5 quarts (5.2L)

Door weatherstrips
Door latch, hood
latch, auxiliary hood
latch, door hinges,
striker plates, seat
tracks and fuel filler
door hinge
Lock cylinders

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)
Engine oil1

Motorcraft威 Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil (US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Full Synthetic Motor Oil
(US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil
(Canada)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Synthetic Motor Oil
(Canada)

Multi-Purpose Grease
(Lithium grease)

•XO-5W20-QSP (US)
•XO-5W20-QFS (US)
•CXO-5W20–LSP12
(Canada)
•CXO-5W20-LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C930-A with API
Certification Mark

XL-1 /
None

XG-4 or XL-5 or
equivalent /
ESB-M1C93-B

XL-6 /
ESR-M13P4-A

PM-1-C /
WSS-M6C62-A or
WSS-M6C65-A1

Motorcraft威 High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid

Between MIN and
MAX on reservoir

Brake fluid
Silicone Spray Lubricant

Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification

Ford Part Name

Capacity

Item

MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES

Maintenance and Specifications

325

326

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)
Fuel tank
(front-wheel drive)

Windshield washer
fluid

Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) fluid (AWD)5

Rear differential
(AWD) fluid

Automatic
transmission fluid

Power steering fluid

Engine coolant

Item

Ford Part Name

Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification

•Motorcraft威 Specialty
Green Engine Coolant
•VC-10-A2 (US)
(dark green-colored)
•CVC-10-A
(Canada) /
•Motorcraft威 Specialty
11.7 quarts
WSS-M97B55-A
Orange Engine Coolant
(11.1L)6,7
•VC-3-B (US)
(US)
•CVC-3-B
(Canada) /
•Motorcraft威 Specialty
WSS-M97B44-D
Orange Engine Coolant
(Canada)2
Between MIN and Motorcraft威 MERCON威 V
XT-5-QM /
MAX on reservoir
ATF
MERCON威 V
11.1 quarts
Motorcraft威
XT-10-QLV /
(10.5L)3
MERCON威 LV ATF4
MERCON威 LV
Motorcraft威 SAE 80W-90
XY-80W90-QL /
2.4 pints (1.15L)
Premium Rear Axle
WSP-M2C197-A
Lubricant
Motorcraft威 SAE 75W-140
XY-75W140-QL /
12 ounces (0.35L)
Synthetic Rear Axle
WSL-M2C192-A
Lubricant
Motorcraft威 Premium
Windshield Washer
ZC-32-A (US)
Concentrate (US)
CXC-37-(A, B, D, and F)
Fill as required
Premium Quality
(Canada)/
Windshield Washer Fluid
WSB-M8B16-A2/- (Canada)
18.3 gallons
—
—
(69.3L)

Capacity

Maintenance and Specifications

19.2 gallons
(72.7L)

Fuel tank (all-wheel
drive)
—

Ford Part Name
—

Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification

Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
2
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Check the coolant reservoir bottle
labeling for the correct fluid type to use.
3
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and
if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set
by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
4
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 LV should only use MERCON威 LV fluid. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information to determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid
other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
5
See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling.
6
Indicates only approximate dry fill capacity. Some applications may vary.
7
Engine coolant with trailer tow package - 11.9 quarts (11.3L)

Capacity

Item

Maintenance and Specifications

327

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE DATA
Engine
Cubic inches
Required fuel
Firing order
Ignition system
Compression ratio
Spark plug gap

3.7L V6 engine
227
Minimum 87 octane
1–4–2–5–3–6
Coil on plug
10.5:1
0.049–0.053 inch (1.25–1.35 mm)

Engine drivebelt routing

1. Short drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine.
2. Long drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine.

328

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

329

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Maintenance and Specifications
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
3. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.

Description
6-speed automatic transmission (6F50)

330

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Code
J

Accessories
LINCOLN CUSTOM ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Lincoln Custom Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Lincoln or Ford of Canada dealer. These
quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory
is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Lincoln’s
rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will
repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Lincoln Custom
Accessories found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessories. The accessories will be warranted
for whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Following is a list of several Lincoln Custom Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. To find out what accessories are
available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online
store at: www.lincolnaccessories.com (U.S. only).
Exterior style
•Deflectors

•Custom graphics*

Interior style
•Ambient lighting
•Floor mats
•Custom seat covers*

•Rear seat entertainment*
•Subwoofer*

331

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Accessories
Lifestyle
•Ash cup / coin holder
•Roof rack and carriers*
•Navigation*
•Rear bumper protector*
•Cross bars
•Cargo net*
•SUV camping tent*
•Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
•Cargo organization and management
Peace of mind
•Remote start
•Keyless entry keypad
•Cargo security shade
•Wheel locks

•Vehicle tracking and recovery*
•Protective seat covers*
•Windshield wiper shaker*
•Bumper and hitch mounted
parking sensors*
*Ford Licensed Accessories (FLA) are warranted by the accessory
manufacturer’s warranty. Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed
and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been
designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements.
Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer’s limited
warranty and/or a copy of the FLA product limited warranty offered by
the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.

332

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Accessories
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
To ensure proper operation of the battery management system (BMS),
any electrical devices that are added to the vehicle should not have their
ground connection made directly at the negative battery post. A
connection at the negative battery post can cause inaccurate
measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
• Any non-Ford electrical or electronic accessories or components that
are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may
adversely affect battery performance and durability and may also
adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the
vehicle.

333

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Ford Extended Service Plan
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (U.S. ONLY)
More than 30 million Ford and Lincoln owners have discovered the
powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind”
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your dealer for details.
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered!
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the U.S.
and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and backed
by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.
• Factory-trained technicians.
• Genuine Ford and Motorcraft威 Parts.
Rental car reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you’re
ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a
risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
• Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
334

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Ford Extended Service Plan
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that
routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine
inspections, preventive care and replacement of items that require
periodic attention for normal “wear”:
• Wiper blades
• Brake pads and linings
• Spark plugs (except
• Shock absorbers
California)
• Clutch disc
• Belts and hoses
Contact your selling Ford or Lincoln dealership today so they can
customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle
and budget.
Interest free finance options available
Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment
opportunity.

335

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Ford Extended Service Plan

336

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Ford Extended Service Plan
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford
Extended Service Plan (ESP). Ford ESP is the only service contract
backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the
plan you purchase, Ford ESP provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement
• Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items
• Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Coverage expires
• Roadside Assistance benefits
There are several Ford ESP plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental.
When you purchase Ford ESP, you receive added peace-of-mind
protection throughout Canada and the United States, provided by a
network of participating Ford Motor Company dealers.
For more information, visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or
www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you.
NOTE: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are
not eligible for Ford ESP coverage. This information is subject to change.

337

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Why maintain your vehicle?
This guide describes the scheduled maintenance required for your
vehicle. Carefully following this schedule helps protect against major
repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and
may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or
trade it.
It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is
performed and that the materials used meet Ford engineering
specifications. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specific in this
guide will invalidate warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of
maintenance. Be sure receipts for completed maintenance are kept with
the vehicle and confirmation of the work performed is always recorded in
this guide.
Your dealer has factory-trained technicians who can perform the required
maintenance using genuine Ford parts. They are committed to meeting
your service needs and to assuring your continuing satisfaction.
Protecting your investment
Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of
improved reliability, durability and resale value. To ensure the proper
performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is
imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated
intervals.
For your convenience, your vehicle is equipped with a message center
which determines the proper oil change service interval. You should
perform the engine oil change as indicated by the message center. The
message center will display ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON or OIL
CHANGE REQUIRED to indicate when an oil change is needed. The
engine oil change service needs to be completed within two weeks or
500 miles (800 km) after the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message is
displayed. Your oil change service interval can be up to one year or
10,000 miles (16,000 km). Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after
each engine oil and filter change; refer to the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
If your message center is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) from your last oil change.
338

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using
different specifications and performance features. That’s why it’s
important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for
various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing.
Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most
appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your
vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance
information.
Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine Ford replacement parts.
Parts other than Ford, Motorcraft威 or Ford-authorized remanufactured
parts that are used for maintenance replacement or for the service of
components affecting emission control must be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. It is the
owner’s responsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts. Please
consult your Warranty Guide for complete warranty information.
Chemicals or additives not approved by Ford are not required for factory
recommended maintenance. In fact, Ford Motor Company recommends
against the use of such additive products unless specifically
recommended by Ford for a particular application.
Oils, fluids and flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic
and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid
needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of
overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected
immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory-trained technicians
at your dealership. Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be changed at the
specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid
that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system, or using
a Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Genuine Ford parts and service
When planning your maintenance services, consider your dealership for
all your vehicle’s needs.
There are a lot of reasons why visiting your dealership for all your
service needs is a great way to help keep your vehicle running great.
339

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make
your service visit more convenient. How’s that for quality service?
Factory-trained technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored
certification training to help them become experts on the operation of
your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification
their technicians have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft姞 replacement parts
Dealerships stock Ford and Motorcraft威 branded replacement parts.
These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications, and
we stand behind them. Parts installed at your dealership carry a
nationwide, 12 month/12,000 mile (20,000 km) parts and labor limited
warranty. Your dealer can give you details.
Value shopping for your vehicle’s maintenance needs
Your dealership recognizes the competitive landscape of maintenance and
light repair automotive services. With factory-trained technicians, and
one-stop service from routine maintenance like oil changes and tire
rotations to repairs like brake service, check out the value your dealers
can offer.
Owner checks and services
Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed
by the owner or a service technician at the intervals indicated. Service
information and supporting specifications are provided in this owner’s
guide.
Any adverse condition should be brought to the attention of your dealer
or qualified service technician as soon as possible for the proper service
advice. The owner maintenance service checks are generally not covered
by warranties so you may be charged for labor, parts or fluids used.
Engine oil/coolant change intervals
As indicated by the message center (can be up
to one year or 10,000 miles [16,000 km])
Engine coolant,
6 years or 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
initial change
(whichever comes first)
Engine coolant,
Every 3 years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
after initial change
Engine oil

340

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Check every month
Engine oil level
Function of all interior and exterior lights
Tires for wear and proper pressure, including spare
Windshield washer fluid level
Check every six months
Battery connections; clean if necessary
Body and door drain holes for obstructions; clean if necessary
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength
Door weatherstrips for wear; lubricate if necessary
Hinges/latches/outside locks for proper operation; lubricate if necessary
Parking brake for proper operation
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag, safety belt) for operation
Washer spray/wiper operation; clean or replace blades as necessary
Multi-point inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the
systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify
potential issues and prevent major problems. Ford Motor Company
recommends the following multi-point inspection be performed at every
scheduled maintenance interval to help ensure your vehicle keeps
running great.

341

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Multi-point inspection – Recommended each visit
Accessory drive belt(s)
Half-shaft dust boots (if equipped)
Battery performance
Horn operation
Clutch operation (if equipped) Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses
Engine air filter
Suspension components for leaks and
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkage
Exterior lamps and hazard
Tires for wear and proper pressure,
warning system operation
including spare
Fluid levels*; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
For oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operation
*Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, manual and automatic transmission
(with an underhood dipstick), power steering (if equipped) and
window washer
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the
multi-point vehicle inspection. It’s a comprehensive way to perform a
thorough inspection of your vehicle. It’s your checklist that gives you
immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. You’ll know
what’s been checked, what’s okay, as well as those things that may
require future or immediate attention. The multi-point vehicle inspection
is one more way to keep your vehicle running great!

342

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide

343

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG
For your convenience, your vehicle is equipped with a message center
which determines the proper oil change service interval. You should
perform the engine oil change as indicated by the message center. The
message center will display ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON or OIL
CHANGE REQUIRED to indicate when an oil change is needed. The
engine oil change service needs to be completed within two weeks or
500 miles (800 km) after the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message is
displayed. Your oil change service interval can be up to one year or
10,000 miles (16,000 km). Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after
each engine oil and filter change; refer to the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
If your message center is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) from your last oil change.

344

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Oil Change Service Interval*
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Change engine oil and filter
•
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure
•
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
tread depth
Inspect wheels and related components for
•
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
Perform multi-point inspection (recommended) •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level (if
equipped with dipstick); consult dealer for
•
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
requirements
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake
•
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
linings, hoses and parking brake
Inspect engine cooling system concentration
•
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
and hoses
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields
•
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Inspect half-shaft boots (if equipped)
•
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension,
tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints; lubricate
•
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
if equipped with grease fittings
Inspect cabin air filter (if equipped)
•
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
*Oil change service intervals should be completed as indicated by the message center
Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after each engine oil and filter change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter

Scheduled Maintenance Guide

345

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Perform the services noted in the following table at the specified
time/mileage (km) period either within 3,000 miles (4,800 km) of the
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the message center or
when the time/mileage (km) reading indicates service is due.
Example #1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at
28,751 miles (46,270 km); perform the 30,000 mile (48,000 km)
automatic transmission fluid replacement.
Example #2: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on
but the odometer reads 30,000 miles (48,000 km); perform the engine air
filter replacement. (i.e., Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ was reset at
25,000 miles [40,000 km].)
Every 20,000 miles
(32,000 km)
Every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km)

Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)

Replace climate-controlled seat filter (if
equipped)
Replace engine air filter
Every 100,000 miles Change engine coolant1
(160,000 km)
Replace spark plugs
Inspect accessory drive belt(s)2
Every 150,000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
(240,000 km)
(filter not required on 6F35, 6F50, DPS6 and
AWF-21 transmissions); consult dealer for
requirements
Change manual transmission fluid
Change rear axle fluid (RWD vehicles)
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced
within the last 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
Replace timing belt (Fiesta); failure to replace
belt can cause internal engine damage
1
Initial replacement at 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 72 months; every
50,000 miles (80,000 km) or 36 months thereafter
2
Perform a follow-up inspection at 120,000 miles (192,000 km)

346

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Maintenance schedule log
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

347

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

348

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

349

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
If you operate your vehicle primarily in one of the more demanding
conditions listed below, you will need to have some items maintained
more frequently. If you only occasionally operate your vehicle under
these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the additional
maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service
advisor or technician.
Towing a trailer or using a camper or car-top carrier
As required – Change engine oil and filter as indicated by message
center and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart
Inspect frequently, service as – See axle maintenance items under Exceptions
required
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) – Change automatic transmission fluid (except 6R80
transmission)
Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) – Change manual transmission fluid

Perform the services noted in the preceding table at the specified
time/mileage (km) period either within 3,000 miles (4,800 km) of the
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the message center or
when the time/mileage (km) reading indicates service is due.
Example #1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at
28,751 miles (46,270 km); perform the 30,000 mile (48,000 km)
automatic transmission fluid replacement.
Example #2: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on
but the odometer reads 30,000 miles (48,000 km); perform the engine air
filter replacement. (i.e., Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ was reset at
25,000 miles [40,000 km].)

350

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Extensive idling and/or low-speed driving for long distances as in heavy
commercial use such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery
As required – Change engine oil and filter as indicated by message
center and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart (except Fiesta)
Inspect frequently, service as – Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
required
– Replace engine air filter
Every 300 hours of engine – Change engine oil and filter (Fiesta)
operation*
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) – Change automatic transmission fluid (except Fiesta and
vehicles equipped with a 6R80 transmission)
Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) – Replace spark plugs

* Engine hour meter installation is recommended for these operating
conditions.
Perform the services noted in the preceding table at the specified
time/mileage (km) period either within 3,000 miles (4,800 km) of the
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the message center or
when the time/mileage (km) reading indicates service is due.
Example #1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at
28,751 miles (46,270 km); perform the 30,000 mile (48,000 km)
automatic transmission fluid replacement.
Example #2: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on
but the odometer reads 30,000 miles (48,000 km); perform the engine air
filter replacement. (i.e., Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ was reset at
25,000 miles [40,000 km].)

351

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads
Inspect frequently, service as – Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
required
– Replace engine air filter
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) – Inspect the wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
– Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or – Change engine oil and filter
6 months
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) – Change automatic transmission fluid (except Fiesta and
vehicles equipped with a 6R80 transmission)
Every 50,000 miles (80,000 km) – Change manual transmission fluid

Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after each engine oil and filter
change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Exclusive use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles only)
Every oil change interval – If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with
regular unleaded fuel

352

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Special operating condition log
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

353

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

354

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
EXCEPTIONS
In addition, there are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule. They
are listed below:
Normal vehicle axle maintenance

❑

Rear axles and power take-off (PTO) units containing synthetic fluid and light duty trucks equipped with Ford-design axles
are lubricated for life. These fluids are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the
axle assembly has been submerged in water. The axle and PTO fluids should be changed anytime the axle and PTO have
been submerged in water. During extended trailer tow operation above 70°F (21°C) ambient and wide open throttle for
extended periods above 45 mph (72 km/h), non-synthetic rear axle fluids should be changed every 3,000 miles
(4,800 km) or three months, whichever occurs first. The 3,000 mile (4,800 km) fluid change interval may be waived if
the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number F1TZ-19580-B
or equivalent. Add friction modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear axles (refer to
Maintenance product specifications and capacities in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for details). The axle fluid
should be changed anytime an axle has been submerged in water.

Police/Taxi/Livery vehicle axle maintenance

❑ Change rear axle fluid every 100,000 miles (160,000 km). Rear axle fluid change may be waived if the axle was filled
with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number FITZ-19580-B or equivalent. Add
four ounces (118 mL) of friction modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear axles.
The axle fluid should be changed anytime the axle has been submerged in water.

California fuel filter replacement

❑

If the vehicle is registered in California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful
life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified
intervals and to record all vehicle service.

Hot climate oil change intervals

❑ If operating conditions are normal and you drive your vehicle under typical, everyday conditions and you are using an API
performance category oil of SL or later (for example SM, etc.) then you can follow the 7,500 mile (12,000 km) normal
service oil change intervals schedule. Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates must follow the oil change interval of 3,000 mile (4,800 km) if the owner is using oils defined by the
American Petroleum Institute (API) performance category of API SK or earlier (for example SJ, etc.).

Engine air filter & cabin air filter replacement

❑

Engine air filter and cabin air filter life is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these
conditions will require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter.

355

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Scheduled Maintenance Guide
ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD
Initial change
After initial change

6 years or 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
(whichever comes first)
Every 3 years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km)

Engine coolant change log
DEALER VALIDATION:

DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

356

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

RO#:
DATE:

P&A CODE:
HOURS:
MILEAGE:

Index
A

Accessory delay ..........................64
Adaptive Cruise Control .............68
AdvanceTrac ..............................215
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ........................141, 149, 152
and child safety seats ............143
description ..............141, 149, 152
disposal ....................................155
driver airbag ............143, 150, 153
indicator light .........149, 151, 155
operation .................143, 150, 153
passenger airbag .....143, 150, 153
side airbag ...............................149
Air cleaner filter ...............321, 324
Air conditioning ..........................35
All Wheel Drive (AWD),
driving off road .........................243
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................300
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ......................213–214
Anti-theft system ..............110, 112
arming the system ..........110, 112
disarming a triggered
system .....................................112
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................223
fluid, adding ............................319
fluid, checking ........................319
fluid, refill capacities ..............325
fluid, specification ..................325
Selectshift (SST) ....................224
Auxiliary power point .................61
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........325

Battery .......................................297
acid, treating emergencies .....297
jumping a disabled battery ....268
maintenance-free ....................297
replacement, specifications ...324
servicing ..................................297

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Belt-Minder威 .............................136
Blind Spot Information System 237
Blind spot mirror ......................236
Booster seats .............................169
Brakes ........................................213
anti-lock ...........................213–214
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................214
fluid, checking and adding ....318
fluid, refill capacities ..............325
fluid, specifications .................325
lubricant specifications ..........325
parking ....................................215
shift interlock ..........................222
Bulbs ............................................50
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....325
Cargo management system ........88
Cargo net .....................................88
Cell phone use ..............................9
Changing a tire .................261, 264
Child safety seats ......................160
attaching with tether straps ..166
in front seat ............................160
in rear seat ..............................160
LATCH .....................................164
recommendations ...................158
357

Index
Child safety seats - booster
seats ...........................................169
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............284
instrument panel ....................285
interior .....................................286
plastic parts ............................284
safety belts ..............................286
washing ....................................282
waxing .....................................283
wheels ......................................283
wiper blades ............................285
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ............35
Collision Warning System .........233
Console ........................................61
overhead ....................................60
Controls
power seat ...............................116
steering column ........................76
Convertible
cleaning ...................................285
Coolant
checking and adding ..............300
refill capacities ................303, 325
specifications ..........................325
Cross Traffic Alert ....................237
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................66
Cupholder(s) .............................124
Customer Assistance ................250
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..................................334, 337
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada .....................278
Getting roadside assistance ...250
Getting the service you
need .........................................274
358

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................280
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................278
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................45
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................319
engine oil .................................294
Driving under special
conditions ..................227, 244, 247
sand .........................................246
snow and ice ...........................248
through water .................246, 249
E
Electronic message center .........18
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................268
running out of fuel .........268, 310
Emission control system ..........315
Engine ........................................328
cleaning ...................................284
coolant .....................................300
fail-safe cooling .......................304
idle speed control ...................297
lubrication specifications .......325
refill capacities ........................325
service points ..................292–293
Engine block heater .................211
Engine oil ..................................294
checking and adding ..............294
dipstick ....................................294
filter, specifications ........296, 324

Index
recommendations ...................296
refill capacities ........................325
specifications ..........................325

Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................312
Gauges .........................................17

Event data recording ....................7
Exhaust fumes ..........................211

Hazard flashers .........................251

Fail safe cooling ........................304
Fleet MyKey programming ........90
Floor mats .............................82–83
Fluid capacities .........................325
Fog lamps ....................................45
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
driving off road .......................244
Fuel ............................................306
calculating fuel economy .......312
cap ...........................................308
capacity ...................................325
choosing the right fuel ...........309
detergent in fuel .....................310
filler funnel .............................310
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................306, 308, 312
filter, specifications ........306, 324
fuel pump shut-off ..................252
improving fuel economy ........312
octane rating ...................309, 328
quality ......................................310
running out of fuel .........268, 310
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................306
Fuses ..................................252–253
G
Garage door opener ....................79
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............308

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Headlamps ...................................43
aiming ..................................46–47
autolamp system .......................44
bulb specifications ....................50
daytime running lights .............45
flash to pass ..............................45
high beam .................................45
replacing bulbs .........................51
turning on and off ....................43
Head restraints .................114, 121
Heated steering wheel ................40
Heating
heating and air conditioning
system .......................................35
Hill start assist ..........................226
Homelink wireless control
system ..........................................79
Hood ..........................................291
I
Ignition ...............................207, 328
Illuminated visor mirror .............60
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................160
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................317
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................285
cluster ........................................12
359

Index
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................46
Intelligent Access Key ................90
Intelligent Access with push
button start ...............................100
J
Jack ............................................261
positioning ...............................261
storage .....................................261
Jump-starting your vehicle ......268
K
Keyless entry system
autolock .....................................97
keypad .....................................108
locking and unlocking doors ..109
programming entry code .......108
Keys ...........................................110
positions of the ignition .........207
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................44
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................50
daytime running light ...............45
fog lamps ...................................45
headlamps .................................43
headlamps, flash to pass ..........45
instrument panel, dimming .....46
interior lamps .....................49, 51
replacing bulbs .........................51
LATCH anchors .........................164
Liftgate ....................83, 88–89, 102
Lights, warning and indicator ....12
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........214
360

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

Load limits .................................196
Locks
autolock .....................................97
childproof ..................................99
doors ..........................................96
Lubricant specifications ...........325
Lug nuts ....................................267
Lumbar support, seats .............117
M
Message center ...........................18
warning messages .....................27
Mirrors ...................................64–65
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ........................................64
fold away ...................................66
heated ........................................65
programmable memory ..........102
side view mirrors (power) .......65
Moon roof ....................................77
Motorcraft威 parts ..............289, 324
MyKey ..........................................90
MyLincoln Touch™ system ........34
O
Octane rating ............................309
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................294
Overdrive ...................................223
P
Parental MyKey programming ...90
Parking brake ............................215
Parts
(see Motorcraft威 parts) ...........324

Index
Passenger Occupant
Classification Sensor .................127
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................257
Power door locks ........................96
Power liftgate ..............................83
Power mirrors .............................65
Power point .................................61
Power steering ..........................221
fluid, checking and adding ....318
fluid, refill capacity ................325
fluid, specifications .................325
Power Windows ...........................62
Push button start system .........209
R
Rear-view camera system .........229
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ......................................158
Relays ........................................252
Remote entry system .........99–100
illuminated entry ....................105
locking/unlocking doors .........101
opening the trunk ...................102
Remote start ...........................106
replacement/additional
transmitters .............................104
replacing the batteries ...........104
Remote start .............................106
Remote start climate
operation .....................................41
Reverse sensing system ...........227
Roadside assistance ..................250
Roof rack .....................................89

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

S
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..126, 130–131, 133–134
Safety Canopy ...................149, 152
Safety defects, reporting ..........281
Safety
restraints ...126, 130–131, 133–134
Belt-Minder威 ...........................136
extension assembly ................133
for adults .................130–131, 133
for children .............................156
Occupant Classification
Sensor ......................................127
warning light and
chime ...............................135–136
Safety restraints - LATCH
anchors ......................................164
Safety seats for children ..........160
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................329
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Normal Scheduled
Maintenance and Log .............344
Seats ..........................................114
child safety seats ....................160
cleaning ...................................287
climate control ........................119
easy access/easyout feature ..121
front seats ...............................118
heated ......................................125
memory seat ...................102, 120
Second-row power fold seat ....122
SecuriCode keyless entry
system ........................................108
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ........................................110
Servicing your vehicle ..............290
361

Index
SOS Post Crash Alert ...............155
Spare tire
(see Changing the Tire) ...........264
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................324, 328
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................325
Speed control ..............................66
Starting your vehicle ........207–208
jump starting ..........................268
push button start system .......209
Steering wheel
controls ......................................76
tilting .........................................58

Touchscreen features
(climate) ......................................38
Towing .......................................202
recreational towing .................205
trailer towing ..........................202
wrecker ....................................272
Transmission .............................223
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....222
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................319
fluid, refill capacities ..............325
lubricant specifications ..........325
Turn signal ..................................48
U
Universal garage door opener ....79

Tilt steering wheel ......................58
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....190
Tires ...........................175–176, 261
alignment ................................183
care ..........................................179
changing ..........................261, 264
checking the pressure ............179
inflating ...................................177
label .........................................189
replacing ..................................181
rotating ....................................184
safety practices .......................183
sidewall information ...............184
snow tires and chains ............195
spare tire .........................262, 264
terminology .............................176
tire grades ...............................176
treadwear ........................175, 180

Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................329
Vehicle loading ..........................196
Ventilating your vehicle ...........211

362

2011 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide, 2nd Printing
USA (fus)

W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......12
Washer fluid ..............................293
Water, Driving through .............249
Windows
power .........................................62
rear wiper/washer .....................58
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................56
checking and adding fluid .....293
replacing wiper blades ...293–294
Wrecker towing .........................272

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Modify Date                     : 2010:10:21 15:47:05Z
Create Date                     : 2010:10:21 15:47:05Z
Pub Date                        : 2010-10
Pubtype                         : Owner Guide
Model Year                      : 2011
Language                        : English
Version                         : 2nd Print
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.0.0 (Windows)
Supercedes                      : false
Model Name List                 : mkx
Market                          : USA
Keywords                        : 
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Ford
Description                     : 
Creator                         : 
Document ID                     : uuid:95cab4de-e09a-47cf-954f-e118fbf322e1
Instance ID                     : uuid:b586ae91-0b32-4a15-9b76-4ff6971290d5
Page Count                      : 362
Subject                         : 
Author                          :

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Lincoln 2011 Mkx Owners Manual Ford

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation